Home

Telenetics 326X V.34 User's Manual

1. Figure C 6 View D Rear Panel Layout 3265 Dial Only Country Specific Information C 15 uoneuuoju oyi2eds Anuno5 Country Specific Information 3266 Modem Leased Line with Dial Restoral This section shows three rear panel views of the 3266 leased line modem with dial restoral and the countries using the layout 3266 Modem Rear Panel View A Figure C 7 shows View A of the 3266 Modem This version is used in Australia Belgium Czech Republic Denmark Finland France e Ireland srael taly Malaysia Netherlands Norway Portugal South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Universal International E e Figure C 7 View A Rear Panel Layout 3266 Leased Line with Dial Restoral C 16 Country Specific Information 3266 Modem Rear Panel View B Figure C 8 shows View B of the 3266 Modem This version is used in Germany and Austria PRIVATE LINE LAM EK OUT Figure C 8 View B Rear Panel Layout 3266 Leased Line with Dial Restoral 3266 Modem Rear Panel View C Figure C 9 shows View C of the 3266 Modem This version is
2. Feature Poland Denmark Finland France ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted in all models Restricted in Rel 4 0 amp Restricted in all models earlier not restricted in Rel 4 1 amp later ATX Always 4 ATX4 Always 4 ATX4 Call Progress AT amp D7 Restricted 108 2 Bsy AT amp G AT amp GO Guard Tone 550 AT amp GI 1800 AT amp G2 AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 33 Always 40 Restricted Pulse Cycle AT amp PI AT amp PO AT E AA Manual AT KAAO0 Manual AT KAAO Always 33 Answer Ring 1 ATK AAT Ring 2 AT KAA2 AT amp PI Ringf2 AT AA2 Usings0 AT gt K AAS Using SO ATX AAS AT Ze BD 2sec AT BDO Manual ATK AAO Blind Dial 4sec AT KBDI Ring 2 AT AA2 AT CD Restricted Loss Dis ATK DD 2 sec AT KDDI 2 sec AT KDDO 4 sec AT KDD2 Off AT gt KCDO Dial Wait 4 sec AT KDD2 4 sec AT EDD 6 sec AT KDD3 3 sec AT KCDI 6 sec AT zk DD 6 sec AT DD3 15 sec AT DD5 Using S7 AT KDDO 15 sec AT zk Dis Usi 7 ATXDD 20 sec ATsppe Using S TD AT gt K DP Always 3 sec 6 sec AT Ze DD3 Pause Delay 12 sec AT ZS DD4 AT Ze DR Off AT gt KDRO Off AT KDRO 3 sec AT DPO Auto Redial 1 AT DRI1 1 AT KDRI 6sec AT DPI 2 AT zk DR2 2 AT E DR2 9 sec AT x DP2 a Wi 12 sec AT gt K DP3 8 AT DR8 8 ATK DR8 ATLL Restricted Restricted LAL Busy Out AT gt KLN Restricted Restricted DTE Pin 25 ATK TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Leng
3. Changing Default Configuration Settings Depending on application requirements you may need to change the following Buffer Delay AT ZS DR EC DC OPTS category when enabled allows buffered data in the communications link to be effectively transmitted to the other modem before the modems disconnect Enable this feature if your application does not ensure a complete transfer of data before the modems disconnect When the 326X is configured for Option Set 1 if you do not use theAT ACU to send commands to operate the modem you must customize the DTE port by selecting these options DTE Rate Set the modem s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE s rate using the DTE Rate option AT KDE TERMINAL OPTS category Parity Set the modem s parity to match the parity set in the asynchro nous DTE using the Parity option AT K RP ACU OPTS category Character Length Set the modem s character length Char Length ACU OPTS category to match the length set in the asynchronous DTE Refer to Appendix A for parameter and setting descriptions n Option Set 1 the default settings assume you will use the AT ACU to oper ate the modem for example the default for ACU Select AT EIA signals are set high If you plan on using DTR transitions DTR Dialing to signal the modem to make a call rather than AT Commands do the following 1 Set Default Dial 1 AT KDA ACU OPTS category 2 Store a number in memory locat
4. Table B 2 ITU V 35 Modem Computer Interface Connections Pin V 35 Signal Definition 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Frame Ground Transmit Data A Receive Data A Request To Send RTS Clear To Send CTS Data Set Ready DSR Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect DCD Receive Clock B Transmit Clock B Transmit Data B Transmit Clock A Receive Data B Receive Clock A Loop 3 Control Data Terminal Ready DTR Frame or protective ground Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote modem Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the remote modem Sent from local terminal to local modem to ready it for data transmission Passes from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is clear to transmit data Occurs in response toRTS Indicates the local modem is ready to transmit and receive data Common signal Provides a common ground reference point for interface circuitry Passed from the local modem to the local DTE when an acceptable carrier signal is received by the modem Not Used Not Used Not Used Timing signal extracted from the received carrier Local modem transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing signal to the local terminal to synchronize transmitted data Digital data transmitted from the local t
5. This section shows rear panel views of the 3265 dial only modem and the countries using the layout 3265 Modem Rear Panel View A Figure C 3 shows View A of the 3265 Modem This version is used in Australia Belgium Czech Republic Denmark Finland reland Israel taly Malaysia Netherlands Norway Portugal South Africa Spain Universal International bessi Figure C 3 View A Rear Panel Layout 3265 Dial Only Country Specific Information C 14 Country Specific Information 3265 Modem Rear Panel View B Figure C 4 shows View B of the 3265 Modem This version is used in Germany and Austria Figure C 4 View B Rear Panel Layout 3265 Dial Only 3265 Modem Rear Panel View C Figure C 5 shows View C of the 3265 Modem This version is used in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom Ss e ECK Ka OUT Figure C 5 View C Rear Panel Layout 3265 Dial Only 3265 Modem Rear Panel View D Figure C 6 shows View D of the 3265 Modem This version is used in France Sweden and Switzerland Lei Ss e ee DTE OUT IN
6. Denmark Hong Kong Spain United Kingdom e U S A Canada DOC Registration and Requirements To comply with the Department of Communications DOC registration requirements you must give the following information to the telephone company Manufacturer and modem model number 3265 3266 3267 or 3268 Telephone number s to which the modem will be connected DOC Registration Number 725 3906A Model 3265 725 3906AB Model 3266 725 4124 AB Models 3267 3268 Load Number 4 C 28 Country Specific Information Industry Canada Equipment Attachment Limitations The Industry Canada label on equipment means it has been tested and found to meet requirements for telecommunications operation and safety in Canada The label does not guarantee however that the equipment will operate to your satisfaction Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Telenetics agent If the equipment malfunctions due to any unauthorized repair or alteration the telecommunications company may request that you disconnect the equipment Ensure that connection to local telecommunications company facilities is permissible and that the equipment is installed properly Compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Ground connections for power and telephone lines should be wired to a single ground line This may be particularly important in rural areas These connecti
7. PBX timed break register recall Auto answer Any other usage will invalidate the approval of the apparatus if as a result it ceases to conform to the standards against which approval was gained This apparatus is only approved for compatible PBXs Telenetics should be con sulted for an up to date list of compatible PBXs There is no guarantee that the apparatus will work in all circumstances Any difficulty should be referred to Telenetics This apparatus is suitable for connection to a PABX which returns secondary proceed indication Compliance with BS6301 Only apparatus conforming with BS6301 may be connected to the telephone socket on the rear of the modem Any interconnection between the above socket and the other modem connections directly or by way of other apparatus may produce hazardous conditions on the BT network Advice should be obtained from a competent engineer before any such connection is made Compliance with BABT SITS 83 009 Section D Caution Do not enter more than two 4 second pauses following the initial access digit or digits Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation Country Specific Information C 35 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Installation of Telephone Socket If you need to obtain a suitable British Telecom socket or extension make a photocopy of the following form complete all the necessary information
8. Refer to Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details LPDA2 ACU The LPDA2 feature lets you use IBM dial and leased line restoral applications with LPDA2 Dial and Disconnect commands LPDA2 allows Netview and other IBM applications like POS outbound dialing applications to control dialing In dial applications LPDA2 eliminates the need for additional ports and equipment that had been required to support external 801 auto dialing equipment in IBM environments About the Modem 1 5 w poN eui 1noqy About the Modem In leased line operation while connected on the dial line the modem can monitor for LPDA2 commands in the data stream If the local modem detects an LPDA2 command the frame that is being processed is aborted This prevents the remote DTE from processing the command frame as valid data Refer to Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details Managing a Modem Integral Network Management by Telenetics 9110 9000 UX and 9000 PC Network Management Systems NMS is standard The NMS can configure monitor and control local and remote modem operation An NMS continuously polls modems to collect management information and check status Network management traffic including alarms commands events and polling is transported to remote modems on an in band channel that does not disrupt user data traffic nor cons
9. Rem Num Rqrd Remote Number Required Specifies whether a remote callback number is required when using AT ZS ZC Callback NOTE For a detailed description of how the modem s access security and call features operate refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide ATK ZRO Off A remote callback number is not required If the calling modem does not provide a callback number the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling back AT ZR1 On A remote callback number is required The modem does not attempt to make a connection or callback if no callback number is provided Sim Ring Simulated Ringback Determines whether the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the calling modem prior to sending an answer back tone immediately after entering the access security password NOTE For a detailed description of how the modem s access security and call features operate refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide AT KZSO Disable No ringback tone is sent to the remote modem prior to sending an answer back tone AT ZS1 Enable After receiving the access security password the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the remote modem prior to sending an answer back tone PW Verify Password Verification This command determines whether the access security feature is enabled If access security is enabled this option selects the method used to verify a password NOTE For a detailed d
10. Option Set 1 The modem connected to a terminal calling an X 25 network or an elec tronic bulletin board Option Set 1 Configuring the Modem The modem as an answer modem connected to one of the following Option Set 2 A Front End Processor FEP or host computer An X 25 host node Asynchronous router bridge Cluster controller calling a host computer Option Set 3 Synchronous terminal calling a host computer Option Set 3 Router bridge calling another router bridge Option Set 3 X 25 node host computer calling another X 25 node host computer Option Set 3 The modem as an external restoral device for leased line failure Option Set 3 Bandwidth on demand for leased line applications Option Set 3 Synchronous Dialing from an IBM AS 400 Option Set 3 The modem as an answer modem connected to one of the following Option Set 4 An electronic bulletin board Models 3260 An asynchronous host computer 62 65 67 A terminal server An asynchronous dial up router bridge The modem connecting routers bridges on a leased line Option Set 4 Models 3261 63 66 68 The modem connecting an FEP to a cluster controller Option Set 4 Models 3261 63 66 68 The modem connecting two FEPs Option Set 4 Models 3261 63 66 68 X 25 statistical multiplexer internodal with dial restoral Option Set 4 Models 3261 63 66 68 4 16 Configuring the Modem Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU
11. 7855 Disab i 2 3 4 KEY Option Included Country Specific 1 in Option Sets Euri Option A 7 Default for All Option Sets D Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets 1 4 Default for Option Set n n 1 4 L Option Set Default for 3261 3263 3266 3268 Modems d Option Set Default for 3260 3262 3265 3267 Modems S Default for 326X V 32bis Modem F Default for 326XFAST Modem f Available with 326XFAST Only SDC Sync Data Compression available for 326XFAST SDC only For example in the Min Rate AT MN option 9600 2 3 4L SDC means 9600 is the default for option sets 2 3 and 4L models 3261FAST 3263FAST 3266FAST and 3268FAST with the Sync Data Compression product Otherwise the default is 300 bps for all option sets Figure A 2 The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure Part 2 of 4 A 4 Configuration Quick Reference eee eee A Y La AT amp R P ren I gt ATTD I gt seen are a Flow Off TpDlyMin Rx Clk 2 3 4L SDC DT High 1 SES Y XON XOFF A Y Escape Normal 2 3 4 gt _ RxD Dly gt k TDrncrs F op _ Discon 4d Remote ATSICTS Displayed only for hese XON XOFF PT 326XFAST SDC products Y Tail 2 SDC Y Tx Clk 2 3 4L SDC Y 3084 3 SDC 64 0t 2 3 4L SDC Y 108 2 Bsy 2 3 57 6 A 56 0t 2 3 4L SDC ATES U S A Can onh Asor n AND gt Rts Cts Delay 0 A DCD High 1 DCD Loss Dis Off
12. ATK AAO Manual An incoming call must be answered manually AT AAI Answer Ring The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the first ring 1 AT AA2 Ring 2 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the second ring AT AA Ring 44 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the fourth ring AT AAA Ring 8 The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the eighth ring ATX AAS Using S0 The modem automatically answers an incoming call according to the setting of S Register S0 Adaptive Rate Adaptive Rate Feature AT APO Off The modem does not use the adaptive rate feature Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 13 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Command Parameter amp Option Description ATK API On The modem monitors telephone line signal quality and negotiates the highest possible rate for a modem s modulation mode You must enable Retrain LAT ZE RT to use the Adaptive Rate Close rear panel switch 1 down so that the modem can inform the terminal of rate changes See Configuring the Modem s Dual In line Package DIP Switches section in this appendix for information Adaptive Rate Operation in V 34 Modulation Mode In the V 34 modulation mode with Adaptiv
13. CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE 35 CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE 32 CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE 36 CONNECT 14400 RELIABLE 37 CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE 38 CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE 34 CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE 39 CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE 41 CONNECT 26400 RELIABLE 84 CONNECT 28800 RELIABLE 85 CONNECT 31200 RELIABLE 87 CONNECT 33600 RELIABLE 88 CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE 42 CONNECT 48000 RELIABLE 82 CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE 83 CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE 76 CONNECT 64000 RELIABLE TI CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE 78 CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE 79 CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE 80 CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE 81 CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE 86 CONNECT RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy 21 CONNECT 600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy 33 CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy 25 A 42 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 5 Result Codes Continued Word Form Response Numeric Form Response CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 14400 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 26400 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 28800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 31200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 33600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 4
14. Command Option Description AT KE TDI Rx Clock With this setting the remote modem uses its internal Rx Clock to control the flow of data from the modem to the DTE preventing a loss of synchronization during data transmission This setting lets the remote modem begin transmitting data before an end of frame has been received from the local modem If the rate of data transmission slows the clock stops temporarily ceasing the flow of data Telenetics recommends that the Rx Clock setting be used in most applications NOTE This setting is operational only when Clock Internal AT amp X AT KTD2 RxD Dly With this setting the remote modem continuously monitors and adjusts line traffic to estimate based on time when to transmit data to the DTE The modem calculates a delay time based on variables such as frame size DTE rate DCE rate and data compression ratio The remote modem waits this time before transmitting data to its DTE NOTE Due to variable line conditions or varying types of data frame losses could result with this selection Tone Length Tone Length Determines the time duration of the DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency tone This command is operational only when tone dialing is selected using dial modifiers or the ATT command ATK TLO E Tone length is 72 ms AT K TLI S11 The tone length is determined by S Register 11 See Appendix C for your country s options Call Timeout Call Timeout Determines how long the modem waits from the ti
15. Default for 326XFAST Modem SDC Sync Data Compression available for 326XFAST SDC only For example inthe Min Rate AT MN option 9600 2 3 4L SDC means 9600 is the default for option sets 2 3 and 4L models 3261 FAST 3263FAST 3266FAST and 3268FAST with the Sync Data Compression product Otherwise the default is 300 bps for all option sets ion Included Country Specific e with 326XFAST Only Figure A 1 The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure Part 1 of 4 Configuration Quick Reference A 3 92uaJ9JeH Joinb uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference eee eee A Le a Mode Direct 2 3 4L struct A Z Normal Expedited v F Reliable Seid Y Auto Rel 1 4d _ Q34LSDC Y Spd AutoRel Delay Oft A EC ID Default A Buf or 38 3 SDC Codex Y Buf amp S38 Le ATDA IK aan ACU Select AT 1 AT Form Async A V25Form Async Default Dial Off 1 2 3 4d lAnswer Manual F wosb syncData F asynSync D F aa Y Ring M T DTR Dial F sBitsync A 2 3 SDC Ring 2 None 2 4 7 Man Dial charsyne in Ring 4 Ring 8 Using SO A Y eee eee gt gt Sync Idle M V25 Resp V25bis Parity V 25bis RsltCode Enable A RsltForm Numeric F char A T vasrate Even T Disable Verbose A F NALOnly Odd T ong Y None Mark Space gt k ax gt LPDA2 ID 326X PDA Det Enab Call Progress 4
16. Dial Auto AT PT DIALING OPTS menu the Dial option setting is not changed from Auto If set to other than Auto the pulse tone setting is modified to force tone dialing If no tone dial modifier is inserted in the number stream the modem dials according to the pulse tone setting or the Dial option in the front panel DIALING OPT S menu These modifiers can also be used as a command outside of the dial string Flash Instructs the modem to flash hook a control signal used by many PBXs to enable special dial features such as transferring a call Return to command state after dialing Instructs the modem to return to command state after dialing without breaking the connection The modem can dial but cannot train and no call progress messages are received This modifier is used when calling an electronic service that permits the user to transmit numbers using tones once a connection is established Configuration Quick Reference A 39 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uolyeinBiyuog Configuration Quick Reference Table A 4 Dial Modifiers Continued Modifier Function Description Makes the modem look for one or more ringbacks followed by five seconds of silence within the delay time specified by Call Timeout If five seconds of delay silence is detected the modem continues to dial the string If the line is busy the modem hangs up and sends a BUSY message to the DTE If the modem does not detect delay silence or a
17. RJ45S Programmable Programmable transmit level The transmit level is 12 dBm if pins 7 and 8 on the jack are open not connected Otherwise the transmit level will be determined by the programming resistor value contact the Telco for further information Leased Line Transmit Level Front Panel Option LL TX Level Factory Default 0 dBm The leased line transmit level for the 3260 3261 3262 or 3263 Modem is adjustable from 0 to 15 dBm in 1 dBm increments Making Telephone to Modem Connections To use a telephone with your modem connect the telephone cable to the PHONE jack at the rear of the modem Connecting an Exclusion Key Telephone In some cases you can connect an exclusion key telephone to the modem for manual dialing and answering or normal voice communication This allows you to answer and initiate calls manually with the telephone and then connect the modem to the line by switching the exclusion key Install an exclusion key telephone as follows 1 Connect the exclusion key telephone to the RJ36 jack if your modem is connected to an RJAMB RJ36 RJ45S RJ36 or RJ16C RJ36 combination 2 Connect the 8 pin modular cable from the modem DIAL LINE jack to the RJ11C RJAMB RJ45S or RJ16C data jack Connect the exclusion key telephone to the PHONE jack on the rear panel if your modem is not connected to an RJ36 jack combination 3 From the TELCO OPT S menu set the Telco option to a jack type RJ16C RJ45S or RJ
18. When signal is on signal quality is acceptable When signal is off signal quality is poor 14 Ext Select All models Signal passed from terminal to modem to select between two option sets Works in conjunction with Ext Select option Models 3261 3263 3266 3268 only Signal passed from terminal to modem indicating whether to use a dial line or a leased line When signal is on modem uses a dial line When signal is off modem uses a leased line This signal is used in Restoral mode only 15 DB 114 Transmitter Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing signal to Signal Element local terminal to synchronize transmitted data TXD See Timing Clock Internal 16 117 Standby Indicator Models 3261 3263 3266 3268 only Signal passed from modem to terminal indicating type of line in use When signal is on modem is on a dial line When signal is off modem is on a leased line This signal is used in Restoral mode only 17 DD 115 Receive Signal Timing signal extracted from the received carrier Local modem Element Timing transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data RXD 18 141 Local Analog Initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem causing it to Loopback Test initiate local analog loopback test 19 Not used 20 CD 108 1 Data Terminal 108 1 Sent by DTE causes the modem to connect to the phone line 108 2 Ready DTR 108 2 Sent by DTE allows the modem to connect to t
19. and return it to your local telephone sales office Application for Installation of Telephone Socket U S A Complete this application and send it to your local telephone sales office only if a suitable British Telecom socket or extension is required I am the owner of a modem Model Approval Number Please arrange to fit two new plan modular sockets as soon as possible Name Address Telephone Numbers Date Signed FCC Registration This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the bottom of your 3260 or 3261 Modem the nameplate label contains the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for your modem If requested by the telephone company you must provide this information This equipment supports the following USOC service codes switched analog dial RJ11C RJ16C RJ45S and RJ4MB The REN is used to determine the number of devices that can be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENS should not exceed five To be certain of the number of devices that can be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area C 36 Country Specific Information If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you If adva
20. i B F Default for 326XFAST Modem f Available with 326XFAST Only SDC Sync Data Compression available for 326X FAST SDC only For example in the Min Rate AT MN option 9600 2 3 4L SDC means 9600 is the default for option sets 2 3 and 4L models 3261 FAST 3263FAST 3266FAST and 3268FAST with the Sync Data Compression product Otherwise the default is 300 bps for all option sets Figure A 4 The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure Part 4 of 4 A 6 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Referenced to Front Panel Optio n s AT Parameter amp Command Option Description Escape Data Mode Enter command mode does not require AT prefix or lt CR gt The character is determined by the content of S Register 2 Al Re Execute Last Command Re executes the last AT command string issued to the modem including redialing a telephone number Does not require AT prefix or CR The modem has a redial security feature See the AT KZD command for details AT x Change S Register Value x new value Lets you change the setting of the S Register that was last accessed with an S Register command AT Display S Register Value Displays the contents of the last S Register accessed AT Attention Code Precedes all commands except and A ATA Manual Answer Causes the modem to answer a call regardless of the ring count
21. if your application requires automatic initiation of dial restoral set Restoral Auto FP When installing the modem in a leased line application the default Mode setting AT kCA MODULATION OPTS category is Answer For proper operation you must set Mode Answer in one modem and Mode Originate in the other modem Depending on application requirements you may change the following Line MODULATION OPTS Default option is 2W Lease Can also be set for 4W Lease application No ACU Form ACU OPTS Default option is Sync Can be set to Async Answer ACU OPTS Default option is country specific Refer to Appendix C to verify that this option is appropriate for your application Restoral RESTORAL OPTS Default option is Auto FP as described above Can be set to Off to disable restoral Clock MODULATION OPTS Default option is Internal Can be set to external or loopback depending on the network clocking source DTE TERMINAL OPTS If No ACU Form Async customize your DTE port by selecting these options Set the modem s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE s rate using DTE Rate AT XDE TERMINAL OPTS category Set the modem s parity to match the parity set in the asynchronous DTE using Parity AT K RP ACU OPTS category Set the modem s character length to match the character length set in the asynchronous DTE using Char Length ACU OPTS category Refer to Appendix A for parameter and sett
22. or Abort Remote Configuration Session Lets you initiate terminate or abort a remote configuration session with the connected modem ATK RCO Terminate The modem terminates a remote configuration session with the connected modem Changes to the remote modem s configuration are saved This setting is not displayed unless you are already in a remote configuration session AT RC1 Abort The modem aborts a remote configuration session with the connected modem Changes made to the remote modem s configuration are not saved This setting is not displayed unless you are already in a remote configuration session AT KRC2 Init Rmt Cnfg The modem attempts to initiate a remote configuration session with the connected modem For instructions on initiating a remote configuration session with a dial leased line modem or terminating or aborting a remote configuration session refer to Chapter 1 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide AT RDn Redial Last With this command the modem redials a call until a successful connection is made or the call Number has been attempted n times This command causes your modem to redial the last number dialed Restore Initiate Terminate Restoral Determines how modems operating on a leased line handle initiation of a dial restoral session The modem has four ways of initiating restoral automatic manual DTE signal or DTE ACU The restoral option is available in models 3261 3263 3266 and the 3268 AT gt REO Off Dis
23. 2 14 Installing the Modem Automatic Self Test When you apply power to the modem it automatically runs a self test that checks for and identifies faults in the modem s circuits After displaying the message SELF TEST the front modem displays one of the messages shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Self Test Messages This Message Indicates 326X Initial The modem is set to operate using factory default values 326X Ready No faults were encountered during the self test The modem is ready for operation Error message A system fault was detected during the self test Handling Error Messages If the modem fails the self test and displays an error message do the following 1 Record the message to assist in troubleshooting the modem 2 Turn the modem off and then on again and observe the front panel display If the modem displays 326X READY the earlier error message was probably caused by a temporary power line problem Some line problems do not affect modem operation If the modem continues to display an error message contact Telenetics Customer Support or an authorized Telenetics distributor After Installing the Modem Go on to Chapter 3 Getting Started for information on how to configure and operate the modem Installing the Modem 2 15 w poN y Duugsut Chapter 3 Getting Started Contents ie E 3 2 System Requirements for Software Upgrades A 3 2 Configuring and Operating the Modem eene
24. 3 2 Using the Front Panel 4 reri petala n i ecxen reden 3 2 Navigating the Configuration Menu Tree eee 3 5 Setting Configuration Options from the Front Panel 3 5 Using the Modem with a Network Management System NMS 3 7 Using the AT Automatic Calling Unit ACU eene 3 8 Other Call Establishment Methods 1 iesus eese rtt scerssurstersdascctanvas 3 10 V 25bis ACU for Sync or Async Applications eee 3 10 NetView LPDA 2 ACU for Sync Applications seeen 3 10 Syne Dialing from an IBM AS 400 sis scscesiersisesecnsecsentsinseccasiueesassunsenseuuns 3 11 External Auto all WS arsperet aeea aeai 3 11 Getting Started 3 1 Doug Dumep Getting Started Introduction This chapter has three parts System Requirements for Software Upgrades Configuring and Operating the Modem Other Call Establishment Methods System Requirements for Software Upgrades This section explains the prerequisites for an upgrade to 7 9 software This section does not apply to new units with 7 8 or higher software installed A modem can be upgraded to Release 7 9 software only if it has Release 7 0 7 5 7 6 or 7 7 software Configuring and Operating the Modem You can configure and operate the modem in several ways From the modem front panel From a Network Management System NMS From the modem AT Automatic Calling Unit ACU if it is attached to an asyn
25. 6 also lists the supported diagnostic tests and instructions for initiating and terminating tests using either the front panel control keys or AT commands For details on tests refer to Chapter 4 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Country Specific Information Telephone company regulations vary by country Because of this there are minor physical or operational differences among 326X Series Modem models Appendix C Country Specific Information provides cabling rear panel layouts interface pinouts and other modem features that are required or restricted by country regulatory agencies NET Compliance This release of the 326X Series Modem complies with the European Telecommunication Standards Institute s ETSI Net 20 21 22 23 and 25 CE Regulatory Marking Directive 93 68 EEC This product is CE marked to indicate compliance with the following European directives 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive Safety 89 336 EEX EMC Directive Compliance with the above directives may only be assured when the equipment is installed and operated in accordance with the instructions for its use and the purpose for which it is intended Products that do not bear the CE mark are not intended for supply or use in the European Union About the Modem 1 9 w poN eui 1noqy Chapter 2 Installing the Modem Contents TREO EE 2 2 Unpacking the Modemi 2 3 Additional Equipment Required dude te
26. ACU This lets the modem accept dial commands With this option either modem can enable the ACU when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on ATK REG FP 116 ACU With this option off to on transitions of this signal from the DTE activate the ACU This lets the modem accept dial commands to initiate restoral With this option either modem can enable the ACU when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on Parity Parity When using the ASCII character set you must select the parity used by the modem and DTE The Parity option applies to asynchronous and character synchronous data formats When set to V 25 the following applies Async 7 Data Bits Parity even Stop Bits 1 Bitsync 7 Data Bits Parity space Stop Bits 1 or 8 Data Bits Parity none Stop Bits 1 AT Ze RPO V 25 Charsync 7 Data Bits Parity odd Stop Bits 1 ATKRP1 Even 7 Data Bits Parity even Stop Bits 1 ATK RP2 Parity Odd 7 Data Bits Parity odd Stop Bits 1 ATK RP3 Mark 7 Data Bits Parity mark Stop Bits 1 or 7 Data Bits Parity none Stop Bits 2 ATK RP4 Space 7 Data Bits Parity space Stop Bits 1 or 8 Data Bits Parity none Stop Bits 1 RTS RTS Control The AT RS command determines how the modem interprets theRTS signal The DTE signals the modem with RTS on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 4 V 24 Circuit 105 AT ERSO Normal The DTE controls data transmission with RTS AT RS1 High The modem sets RTS high Use this setting if the DTE does not provideRTS If you
27. AT MN Min Rate parameter options are within the valid range for the mode AT ZS MMO V32bis Auto The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation modes V 32bis V 32 coded or uncoded V 22bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 depending on the Low Speed option AT MM1 Auto V32 The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation modes V 32 coded or uncoded V 22bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 depending on the Low Speed option AT ZE MM Mod V32bis V 32bis or V 32 modulation mode is used Only AT EMM3 V32 Only V 32 modulation mode is used AT gt KMM12 V32 Uncoded V 32 modulation mode is used without the Trellis coded Modulation TCM scheme This selection reduces end to end data delay With this selection while operating at 4 8 bps you do not have an embedded secondary channel i e network management and remote configuration capability are not available AT EMMA V22bis Only V 22bis modulation mode is used AT EMMS5 212 Only Bell 212 modulation mode is used AT MM6 103 Only Bell 103 modulation mode is used AT ZE MM V21 Only V 21 modulation mode is used ATZEMMIO V4 Auto The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation modes V 34 V 32bis V 32 coded or uncoded V 22bis Bell 212 V 21 or Bell 103 depending on the Low Speed option This option does not display on the 3264V 32bis Series Modem ATXMMI11 V 34 Only
28. AT command syntax Chapter 6 for a discussion of common problems and how to correct them Appendix A to change configuration options The Reference Card shows the complete menu structure The modem also supports an ITU TS V 25bis ACU for initiating calls from an asynchronous or synchronous DTE described later in this chapter Using the Modem with a PC and Async Communications Software When using the modem with a PC you need communications or terminal emulation software Communications software acts as an interface with pull down menus or graphics between your PC and modem allowing you to perform modem operations from your PC It is unlikely that you will use AT commands directly to configure and test the modem Some communications software however may not support all of the modem s configuration options or may require you to issue commands to the modem directly Communications software packages that directly support the modem where Telenetics 3260 Modem Codex 3260 Modem or Motorola 3260 Modem is a selection within the package support the industry standard commands AT AT amp and the Telenetics enhanced commands AT making more knowledge of AT command syntax unnecessary Communications software packages that offer a Hayes Compatible selection do not support Telenetics enhanced commands AT zs In this case you may enter AT commands yourself if required by your application Where Do I Go from Here
29. BT signaling of 2280 Hz The equipment detailed in this guide is designed for use on a 2 or 4 wire point to point private circuit It is not suitable for omnibus or multipoint circuits The frequency range of DC to 200 Hz is not used Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 7 There is no DC interaction between the modem and the British Telecommunications private circuit Country Specific Information C 32 Country Specific Information Compliance with BABTSITS 82 01 C and BABT SITS 82005S D The approval of this modem for connection to British Telecommunications private speechband circuits is invalid if the apparatus is subject to any modification not authorized by the British Approvals Board of Telecommunications BABT or if it is used with or connected to any of the following nternal software that has not been formally accepted by BABT External software or external control apparatus that causes the operation of the modem or associated call setup equipment to contradict the requirements of the standards set out in BABT SITS 82 01 C or BABT SITS 82 005S D All apparatus connected to this modem and thereby connected directly or indirectly to British Telecommunications private speechband circuits must be approved apparatus as defined in Section 16 of the British Telecommunications Act of 1981 Compliance with BS6305 Clause 6 2 BS6320 Clause 7 2 The modem is suitable for connection to the public switched
30. Based on the disconnect reason take the appropriate action Ensure that Mod C Fast Auto or V32bis Auto Ensure Mode AutoRel AT SM3 on both the local and remote modems If DCD is not set to Normal issueAT amp C1 from the DTE or set DCDzNormal from the front panel A call is established but Read the disconnect code not maintained Based on the disconnect reason take the appropriate action 6 4 Troubleshooting Guide 326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution Cannot hear connection Check Speaker ATM option through the speaker stand alone units Check Volume ATL option If the speaker is not on turn it on Adjust volume DATA MODE The modem connects but cannot pass data Check that the modem is in data mode Data 9600 for example displays Check that the TD LED is lit on modem s front panel steady or flashing indicating that the modem is receiving data from the DTE Check the DTE rate of the local modem Check the DTE s flow control method If in normal mode check for modem to modem flow control Verify line quality Run a remote digital loopback RDL or RDL with pattern test If you are still receiving errors disconnect the modem from the line and perform a local analog loopback LAL or LAL with pattern test with modem flow control off If the modem is not in data mode establish a connection
31. Codex Codex DCD Loss Dis S10 S10 S10 S10 S10 DSR High Drop on Disc Normal Normal Normal Overspeed 196 196 196 196 196 DTR Delay 25 25 25 25 25 DTE Ct 140 Off Off Off Off Off DTE Ct 141 Off Off Off Off Off DTE Pin 25 Test Test Test Test Test Ext Select Off Off Off Off Off Ext Cntrl Pin 14 Pin 14 Pin 14 Pin 14 Pin 14 Inactivity S30 S30 S30 S30 S30 V32bis Series default shown first V 34 Series default shown second Configuring the Modem 4 13 w pon eui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Table 4 4 Option Set Defaults 326X SDC V 34 Modem Option 3261 63 66 68 MOD OPT S Line Mod Auto Type Low Speed Max Rate Min Rate V 34 Asym Fast Call Adaptive Rate Mode Clock Retrain Longspace PSTN Guard Tone RESTORAL OPT S Restore LtoD DtoL Hold Dialine Ans Rest EC DC OPT S Mode Buffers EC DC Data Form Break Modem Flow Delay EC ID ACU OPT S ACU Select AT Form V25 Form NoACU Form Default Dial Option Set 1 Dial V 34 Auto CCITT Country specific 33 6 300 On Off On Originate Internal High BER Off On Country specific Off Low Fast Manual Off LL Fail Auto Rel Regular V 42 Enabled NRZ Destruct On Off Default AT Async Bitsync Async Off Option Set 2 Dial V 34 Auto CCITT Country specific 33 6 9600 On Lvl3 On Answer External High BER Off On Country specific Off Low Fast Manual Off LL Fail Auto Rel Regu
32. D2 AT amp D3 AT amp D4 AT amp DS5 AT amp D6 AT amp D7 Discon Reset Tail 108 1 108 2 108 2 Bsy The modem hangs up and enters command mode when an on to off DTR transition is detected while the modem is in data test or escape mode If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer The modem hangs up if connected and loads the specified option set when an on to off DTR transition occurs If DTR is low the modem auto answers This setting is similar to 108 1 except that the modem auto answers an incoming call even if DTR is off When DTR transitions from off to on the modem connects to the telephone line and dials if the Default Dial option is enabled The DTR signal emulates the function of the Talk Data at the Home position key on the modem s front panel An off to on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming ring it answers the call If the modem does not detect an incoming call the modem dials the number specified by the Default Dial option An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line and DTR is turned on by the DTE the modem responds to all AT commands When the DTE turns DTR off the modem does not respond to dialing and answering AT commands but responds to all other AT commands The DTR signal must remain on throughout the connection An on to off DT
33. DCE Rate the modem to modem rate is displayed If Speed Conversion Off AT KSCO or if the modem is operating in Direct or synchronous modes the CONNECT message speed reflects both the DTE to modem and the modem to modem rate which are the same Table A 5 provides a listing of word and numeric form result codes Table A 5 Result Codes Word Form Response Numeric Form Response OK 0 CONNECT 1 RING 2 NO CARRIER 3 ERROR 4 CONNECT 1200 5 NO DIALTONE 6 BUSY 7 NO ANSWER 8 PASSWORD PROTECTED 40 INITIATING RC 50 RC NOT AVAILABLE 51 RC FAILED 52 RC DENIED 53 RC ESTABLISHED 54 UNDER RMT CONFIG 55 RC COMPLETE 56 RC ABORTED 57 RC SESSION IN PROGRESS 58 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INHIBITED 60 CONNECT 600 13 CONNECT 2400 10 CONNECT 4800 11 CONNECT 7200 15 CONNECT 9600 12 CONNECT 12000 16 CONNECT 14400 17 CONNECT 16800 18 CONNECT 19200 14 CONNECT 21600 19 Configuration Quick Reference A 41 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 5 Result Codes Continued Word Form Response Numeric Form Response CONNECT 24000 20 CONNECT 26400 63 CONNECT 28800 64 CONNECT 31200 67 CONNECT 33600 68 CONNECT 38400 22 CONNECT 48000 61 CONNECT 56000 62 CONNECT 57600 23 CONNECT 64000 24 CONNECT 72000 26 CONNECT 76800 27 CONNECT 96000 28 CONNECT 115200 29 CONNECT 128000 65 CONNECT RELIABLE 21 CONNECT 600 RELIABLE 33 CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE 25 CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE 30 CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE 31
34. EIA TIA 232 D and ITU Rate V 35 Interfaces B 6 DIAL LINE LEASE PRIVATE LINE PHONE Connector Pinouts B 6 NC Network Control Port Pinouts sees B 7 ri IM e n B 7 Cable WE EE B 7 DTE Cable Diagnostics 12 25 oor rro nct eere ada tara Go Pesce B 10 Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 1 s nould ooeyelu Introduction This appendix describes the following Interface pinouts common to all modem models including EIA TIA 232 D and ITU V 35 Recommendation modem to computer interfaces NC IN and OUT network control port interfaces 326X 326X SDC cabling requirements and diagnostics Audio connector DIAL LINE LEASE PRIVATE LINE and PHONE pinouts vary by country See Appendix C for your country s pinouts EIA TIA 232 D Modem to Computer Interface The modem s digital interface conforms to the EIA TIA 232 D standard and ITU V 24 ITU V 28 and ISO 2110 the modem should be connected to a data terminal with a compatible digital interface Table B 1 NOTE For DTE rates greater than 38 4 kbps refer to the Cabling section to determine cables and lengths Interface Pinouts Table B 1 Modem Computer Interface Connections EIA TIA Pin 232 D ITUV 24 Signal Definition 1 Not used 2 BA 103 Transmitted Data Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote modem TXD 3 BB 104 Receive
35. Jack Type i eite Using the Modular Nest Backplane s Busy Out Feature C 14 C 16 C 18 C 18 C 21 C 23 C 24 C 31 C 32 C 32 C 33 C 33 C 33 C 34 C 34 C 34 C 34 C 35 C 35 C 35 C 36 C 36 Contents continued Glossary Return Procedures BEgquiptient Retain Procedures i5 xoreto vip a odi ret 2 Expiration of Lease scoartei eria ere E Pet pro n ep GE m e REE ret 2 PCI E ret 2 Packaging Guidelines for Equipment Return eese ret 2 1X Overview Using the Documentation Set The 326X product documentation set includes the 326X V 34 Series Modem Reference Card TEL T0009 01 Optionally with a 326X Series Modem card backplane to install a 326X card into a Modular Nest 9 or 21 enclosure you receive the following 326X Series Modem Cards Part No TEL 09949 Throughout this guide references to the 326X Series Modem apply to 326X V 32bis 326X V 34 and 326X SDC Series Modems unless stated otherwise 326X Series Modem Family The 326X product family consists of three series V 34 V 34 SDC and V 32bis Supports This This Maximum And This Maximum This Series Modulation DCE Rate DTE Rate 326XFAST V 34 ITU V 34 33 6 kbps 128 kbps asynchronous 326XFAST SDC ITU V 34 33 6 kbps 128 kbps asynchronous and with proprietary compression 128 kbps synchronous 326X ITU V 32bis 14 4 kbps 57 6 kbps asynchronous IMPORTANT When you select a modulat
36. Not Connected User Special Out 7 Ground Ground 8 DCD In DCD Out In signals use a DCE type interface This type of interface connects directly to the DTE type interface provided by Telenetics Network Management Systems Out signals use a DTE type interface This type of interface may connect to a Telenetics or Motorola network managed product This section provides important information about cabling and operating the modem at DTE rates greater than 19 2 kbps NOTE 326X FAST and 326XFAST SDC Series Modems are referred to as 326X Series Modems here Caution When operating the modem at DTE rates higher than 19 2 kbps carefully follow the information here to determine the cables to use with your application For the modem to operate as specified Telenetics has indicated the maximum capaci tance of cables to be used when operating at data rates higher than 19 2 kbps If this method is not followed your modem may cause errors in data transmission Telenetics makes no guarantee of proper modem operation if you do not use a cable with the correct capacitance Cable Considerations Telenetics has specified a maximum allowable cable capacitance for use with the expanded data rates of 326X modems Yo umust determine the correct capacitance of the cable you intend to use with the modem Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 7 sjnould eoeyelu Interface Pinouts Table B 4 shows a range of data rates and maximum all
37. PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call or e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions 14 subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of 15 calls within one hour the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing Norway Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call No dial tone was detected e The call is not answered within the time in the C
38. Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution Check the modem s line setting AT amp L Check that the TR LED on modem s front panel is steady on Check that the RI OH LED is on when ring is present on the line Check that the communications package s data rate is set to a rate that the modem s autobaud feature supports Modem won t dial Ensure dial tone is present If using DTR dial check Default dial option AT DA Phone number at stored location presence of one DTR option AT amp D Check that the communications package s data rate is set to a rate that the modem s autobaud feature supports Ensure Line Dial AT amp LO If the TR LED is not steady on ensure the DTE is supplying DTR Check that the phone number you are calling is correct Check phone line and ensure it is properly connected to the modem s rear panel Ensure default dial option is set to a location with a valid phone number Ensure that DTR 108 1 AT amp D5 or Tail AT amp D4 Ensure the DTE is supplying DTR Unable to establish a Check the disconnect code from connection the front panel or AT response Check the modulation configuration e Mod AT XMM e Max Rate AT MX e Min Rate AT MN Check EC DC Mode AT ZS SM option Software package Ensure DCD Normal AT amp C1 displays on line connection status before calling or answering is performed
39. Set the modem for hardware flow control condition modem set for XON e Set Flow Off AT KFLO XOFF and DTE set for hardware flow control The modem connects at a lower rate than the maximum as set in the Max Rate AT MX option Check CQMS parameters for Line quality is not sufficient to support higher data rate If line quality line quality improves the modem will increase its speed automatically Ensure that the remote modem supports the DCE rates you anticipate Excessive modem retrains Retry call Continuous retrains indicate a line problem Contact your telephone company 6 6 Troubleshooting Guide 326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution CALL TERMINATION Modem takes too long to disconnect Check to see if remote modem supports PSTN cleardown If remote modem doesn t support PSTN cleardown try to change the setting of DCD Loss Disconnect LAT SCD to a smaller number Modem doesn t disconnect when DTR drops or Modem doesn t disconnect when communications software package does Check modem s DTR option for correct setting Set DTR to an option other than High Set DTR Discon AT amp D2 Communications software package won t signal the modem to return to command state when escape sequence is issued Ensure the escape sequence complies with the modem s guard time requirements refer to Line f
40. Test ATK LT TERMINAL OPT s category to enable Busy Out Select 2 The AT amp J Telco option command must be set to RJ4MB A 44 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 6 Rear Panel Switches Continued Switch Number Setting Function 3 Off up Front panel enable The front panel functions normally On down Front panel disable You can check only the status displays NOTE If the modem is under remote configuration control the controlling modem retains full front panel control 4 Off up Normal password protection applies On down Reinitializes modem to its factory settings Use this when you forget your password to unlock password protection See Table A 1 under AT gt PN 5 Off up The AT and V 25bis or LPDA 2 command sets can be used from an attached terminal On down AT and V 25bis commands cannot be used from an attached terminal NOTE If the modem is under remote configuration control the controlling modem retains AT ACU control 6 Off up Factory use only For proper operation this switch must be off Configuration Quick Reference A 45 o2ueJoJou oinp uoneanBiyuo Appendix B Cabling and Interface Pinouts Contents e E B 2 EIA TIA 232 D Modem to Computer Interface sess B 2 ITU Recommendation V 35 Modem to Computer Interface B 4 ITU Rate V 35 Modem to Computer Interface Pinouts B 5 Differences
41. The message indicates that the local DTE to modem data rate as well as the error correction and data compression schemes are being used A typical long reliable connect message is CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC LAPM DC V42bis Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 31 92uaJ9JjeH Joino uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description Callback Callback Feature Determines the source of the telephone number that your modem calls when it receives a valid access security password from the remote modem NOTE For details on access security and call features see Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide ATK ZCO Off Callback is disabled AT ZC1 9 Intern1 9 The answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored in the specified location even if the calling modem provides a callback number AT KZC10 Remote The answer modem performs the callback using a number provided by the remote user If the calling modem does not provide a callback number and the password is valid the modem attempts a connection without hanging up or calling back Only accessi Manager The NMS performs the callback using a phone number stored in its database that is associated ble from an with the received ID code This
42. Time 5 14 25 DTR Delay 5 15 26 RTS CTS delay 5 15 30 DTE Inactivity Disconnect 5 15 38 Disconnect buffer delay 5 16 45 Access security tone duration 5 16 46 access security lead digit delay timeout 5 16 98 AC Detect 5 18 changing values with the AT x command 5 10 cross referenced to AT commands and front panel options A 38 displaying value 5 9 AT command 5 10 standalone modems 1 2 Standalone rear panel view model 3261 C 13 model 3265 C 14 C 15 model 3266 C 16 Status snapshots 1 8 Sweden C 11 Switzerland C 11 synch data format 3 2 Synchronous data compression SDC 1 7 T Talk data switch 3 6 Telenetics extended AT command set 1 5 Telenetics offices 2 3 Telenetics website 2 3 telephone book 1 5 telephone connection to modem C 41 terminal server 4 16 Test timer S Register 18 5 14 Tests Modem Diagnostic 6 10 tests 1 9 6 10 A 44 Tests automatic self test 2 15 Tests SDC 6 11 timing 4 18 4 23 5 4 TR LED 3 4 training sequence 5 18 Troubleshooting overview 6 2 RFI 2 7 V 54 and V 22bis tests 1 9 Troubleshooting Guide table 6 3 U UNDER RMT CONFIG messag eA 41 United Kingdom C 11 C 32 Universal C 11 UNIX workstation 4 16 Unpacking the modem 2 3 V V 25bis ACU 3 10 V 34 modulation 1 6 V 34 operation and cabling 2 6 V 35 electrical interface A 44 V 35 interface B 4 B 6 V 42bis A 43 Vorsichtshinweis Beschreibung xvi Ww w dial modifier 5 12 Wait for data carrier S Regis
43. U S A Canada 56 0 U S A Canada 56 0 U S A Canada 64 0 other countries 64 0 other countries 64 0 other countries Flow XON XOFF Tx CIk Tx CIk Tx CIk TpDlyMin NA Rx Clk Rx Clk Rx Clk Speed Conver On On On On DTR High Tail 108 1 High RTS High Normal Normal Normal CTS AsynSync Normal Normal Normal RTS CTS Delay 0 0 0 0 DCD High Normal Normal Normal RemRST DCD Codex Codex Codex Codex DCD Loss Dis S10 S10 S10 S10 DSR High Normal Normal Normal Overspeed 196 196 196 196 DTR Delay 25 25 25 25 DTE Ct 140 Off Off Off Off DTE Ct 141 Off Off Off Off DTE Pin 25 Test Test Test Test Ext Select Off Off Off Off Ext Cntrl Pin 14 Pin 14 Pin 14 Pin 14 Inactivity S30 S30 S30 S30 Configuring the Modem 4 15 w poN y BuunBiyuo5 326X V 32bis and 326XFAST Modem Application Examples This section provides application examples for each option set and notes options you may need to change from factory default settings for each option set For This Type of Application Select The modem connected to a remote terminal dialing into an asynchronous host computer VAX for example Option Set 1 The modem connected to a remote PC dialing into a LAN remote node and remote control application Option Set 1 Remote X Terminal dialing to a UNIX workstation or PC into a central site for example a UNIX based terminal server or mini computer Option Set 1 The modem connecting LANs via dial up router bridge
44. _DSR High 1 M Normal 2 34 MES Normal 3 4d L em ACU On MEG 2 SDC 24 0 2 34LF Tan Remote Y 2 21 6t 26 Wink 19 2 4d 16 8 14 4 2 3 4L 8 12 0 9600 I gt aun IK De gt xoc 7200 DTR Delay S25 A Inactivity Off 4800 user 3min 2400 115 sec 10min 1200 20min 300 P ld S30min Y eee eee Figure A 3 The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure Part 3 of 4 Configuration Quick Reference A 5 9 Eg o T2 ye a Am ch o E 50 o 2 o Configuration Quick Reference A A Telco RJ1 1C DL TX Level 0 Speaker Dialing D Volume Medium D Y RJ45S Yu Y On Y Loud pn Y Security soft CTRAMB or ra ATP AIT gt wan I gt axo gt xe gt wart IK gt Dial Tone Call Timeout 30 Blind Dial 2 Pulse Cycle 40 Pulse Ta o T am WwW 6 Aus 60 ee 38 20 La I aF IK Al I gt ww La mi PW Verify Dis D Callback Off D Tone None D T Intern intern 1 v Prompt Only 7 Mngr intern n k Only intern 9 h Prompt Ack Remote Manager Rmt Ind Option Included Country Specific 1 in Option Sets Ss Option Le A 7 Default for All Option Sets D Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets ww Lei Y gt 1 4 Default for Option Set n n 1 4 A L Option Set Default for 3261 3263 3266 3268 Modems v B n La gt d Option Set Default for 3260 3262 3265 3267 Modems Gei A ww
45. and Interface Pinouts 5 If the transmitted and received messages are different 1 e character or framing errors verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table B 4 Reduce the cable length or capacitance of the cable to the theoretical limit and retry the steps listed in this section If the same cable length is required it is recommended that a low capacitance type cable be used If the modem is installed at a host site perform the following steps 1 Set the Mode option AT KSM EC DC OPT S category to Reliable Reliable mode ensures data is transmitted during this test NOTE Do not initiate loop tests while performing the diagnostic procedures in this section 2 Follow Steps 1 to 3 in the section above to verify the cable at a remote site 3 Once the cable at the remote site has been verified initiate a dial connection with the host site 4 If there are no errors in data transmission the cable at the host site is most likely appropriate for the application 5 If the transmitted and received messages are different the cable at the host site is most likely incorrect for the application Verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table B 4 Reduce the cable length or capacitance of the cable to the theoretical limit and retry Steps 1 to 3 in the section above If the same cable length is required it is recommended that a low capacitance type cable be used NOTE These tests should be done prior to a Local
46. are using Normal or Reliable data transfer mode and you are using RTS CTS flow control this setting is overridden and RTS operates as if RTS Normal AT KRS2 Remote This setting applies to simulated half duplex applications and works only if the remote modem also supports RTS DCD signaling For this application to work properly the DCD option at the remote site must be set to Remote Coordinate your setting with the remote site Retrain Auto Retrain Enables the auto retrain feature When enabled the modem retrains if the specified bit error rate is exceeded Enable Retrain for most applications because retrains allow the modem to compensate for changing line conditions AT gt KRTO Off The modem does not automatically initiate retrains but responds to retrains from the remote modem AT RTI Low BER The Low BER setting is more sensitive than the High BER setting Using V 34 V 32bis V 32 or V 32 Uncoded the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 1074 for eight seconds Using V 22bis the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 4 for one second Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 28 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT RT2 High BER The High BER setting is less sensiti
47. as non Telenetics and non Motorola DSU CSUs the DSU s restoral configura tion should be set to Timing Internal 4 8 Configuring the Modem With this option set the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with modified V 42bis data compression Enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT KSM is set the same in both modems The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 Auto modulation mode This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Option Set 3 Sync Dial Only Option Set 3 satisfies the needs of a synchronous dial application see Table 4 2 With Option Set 3 the modem provides the network timing Clock Internal Select a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE using DTE Rate AT DE Consult the description in Appendix A With this option set the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with a modified V 42bis data compression Enable Option Set 3 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT KSM is set the same in both modems With Option Set 3 DTR 108 1 so that an off to on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming call the call is connected If the modem does not detect an incoming call and Default Dial
48. asynchronous AT Automatic Calling Interface Auto Call Unit or ACU that is compatible with the industry standard AT command set AT commands provide a standard modem communications interface allowing you to configure and operate a modem from an asynchronous terminal or PC keyboard AT commands define how the modem is configured how it makes calls and the test operations the modem performs In addition to supporting industry standard AT commands Telenetics has developed an enhanced AT command set for the modem Industry Standard AT Command Set AT and AT amp These commands called action AT commands are intended for immediate modem action and let you perform day to day operations such as dialing and storing numbers from your asynchronous DTE TheseAT commands do not cross reference to the modem front panel Telenetics Enhanced AT Command Set AT Using these Telenetics AT extensions you can also configure most modem options These AT commands called configuration AT commands control the same options as in your modem s front panel menu tree This chapter discusses The AT Command Set Using AT commands Action AT commands S Registers For an alphabetized quick reference list of AT commands corresponding front panel options and command functions see Appendix A The 326X Series Modem supports two additional ACUs V 25bis ACU for asynchronous and synchronous applications LPDA2 ACU for synchronous application
49. break handling It passes the break to the remote site immediately without deleting data from its buffers AT BK2 Standard The modem uses standard break handling It passes the break to the remote site in sequence with any transmit data from its buffers Mode Answer Originate Mode AT ZS CAO Orig The modem operates as an originating modem in a manual answer dial application AT KCAI1 Answer The modem operates as an answer modem in a manual answer dial application ATKCA2 External The signal from the DTE on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 11 determines whether the modem is in answer or originate mode If the signal is off the modem is in originate mode if the signal is on the modem is in answer mode AT CA3 Auto A in O The modem configures itself as an originating modem after auto answering a call In leased line operation the modem functions as if it is set to originate calls NOTE The functions provided by this setting only apply when the modem auto answers DCD Loss Dis DCD Loss Disconnect AT KECDO Off The modem will not disconnect due to loss of carrier AT KCD1 3s The modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 3 seconds AT CD2 7s The modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 7 seconds AT KCD3 S10 The modem checks the value stored in S Register 10 to determine when it disconnects due to loss of carrier See the S Registers section in Chapter 5 for more information Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for
50. call your local distributor or call Telenetics at 949 455 4000 If you require on site service or unit exchange service call your local distributor or call Telenetics at 949 455 4000 Expiration of Lease To return equipment upon expiration of a lease agreement contact Telenetics for return authorization and instructions A list of these offices is available on the Tele netics website When you contact the sales office provide the following information Product name and description Serial number Customer order number Reason for return Factory Repair To return equipment for factory repair call Telenetics at 949 455 4000 for return authorization and instructions When you call you will be given a Return Material Authorization RMA control number Mark this number clearly on the shipping container for ease of identification and faster service The RMA control number provides a convenient tracking reference for both parties Please have the following information available for each piece of equipment yo ureturn Product name and description e Serial number Failure symptoms Packaging Guidelines for Equipment Return 2 Return Procedures Data communications equipment or parts that are to be returned to Telenetics must be properly packaged to prevent damage in shipment and handling If the original packing material and shipping container are available reuse these items to return equipment If these i
51. configuration are compatible with the maximum and minimum rate e Mode AT KCA options e Max Rate AT MX e Min Rate AT ZS MN Check the leased line transmit If this setting is adjustable in your country adjust level option in both thelocaland transmit level to approximately 15 dB remote modems LL TX Level TELCO OPTS Troubleshooting Guide 6 9 Bunoouse qnoujj 326X Series Modem Diagnostic Tests The modem supports loopback busy out and retrain tests to assist you in isolating network problems These tests analyze the telephone line and the local and remote modem s performance These tests can be initiated from the modem s front panel Troubleshooting using AT commands from an attached PC or terminal or from a network management system The following table shows the AT commands to initiate and terminate tests The steps following the table describe how to initiate and terminate each test from the front panel Refer to your network management system documentation for instructions on initiating and terminating tests from the network management system IMPORTANT The tests described in this section cannot be run simultaneously Because each test interrupts data flow in a network notify equipment users at both the local and remote sites before starting tests For details on tests refer to Chapter 4 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Test Description Cd Local Analog Tests the local modem s
52. data buffering occurs and the disconnect is immediate ATK DB2 Buf amp S38 This setting prevents the timer from starting until either the transmit or receive buffers have emptied The modem then disconnects Once the timer expires when the modem is set to Direct mode data is not buffered and the timer starts immediately Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 16 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT DB3 S38 This setting allows the timer to start immediately upon detection of a disconnect request The request continues to process either its transmit or receive buffers The modem disconnects when the timer expires regardless of the buffer states NOTE In Direct mode no data buffering occurs However the modem delays a disconnect until the timer expires DC Data Compression AT DCH Disable Data compression is not attempted AT DC1 Enable Data compression is attempted If the modem is using LAPM error correction it uses V 42bis data compression when DC Enabled NOTE In an application with SDC enabled LAPM error correction and V 42bis data compression only are used If your modem is using MNP error correction it attempts to negotiate V 42bis and MNP 5 data compression with the remote modem Depending on which data compression type can be acc
53. delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing Forbidden List The modem detects a forbidden condition A call is dialed by the modem and answered by a remote modem but an Answer Back Tone ABT is not detected by the calling modem A call is manually aborted via the front panel or the V 25 bis ACU If the modem detects two occurrences of a forbidden condition for a number within a 2 minute period the number is placed on the forbidden list and no calls are allowed to this number If the call is successfully dialed within the 2 minute period the forbidden condition is cleared If not the number remains on the forbidden list and calls to this number are not allowed until the modem is powered down and then turned on again Country Specific Information C 25 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Hong Kong Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds five numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call e The call is not answered withi
54. describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts Table C 8 Dial Line Interface All Card Models Dial Line A and Hong Kong Dial Line B South Africa All Other Connector Pin Canada U S A United Kingdom Countries 1 MB Not Used Not Used 2 MBI U K Bell Not Used 3 MI Telset Ring Telset Ring 4 Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip Tip Tip 6 MIC Telset Tip Telset Tip 7 PR Not Connected Not Used 8 PC Not Connected Not Used Country Specific Information C 21 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3262 3267 2 wire leased line connections are made via the 2W LEASE interface for modem A and via the 2W 4W LEASE interface for modem B Tabl eC 9 describes 2 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 9 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3262 3267 2 Wire Lease and Hong Kong 2 and 4 Wire Lease South Africa All Other Connector Pin Canada U S A United Kingdom Countries 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 Not Used Not Used Not Used 3 Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip Tip Tip 6 Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Connected Not Used 8 Not Used Not Connected Not Used 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3263 3268 2 wire leased line connections are made via the 2W AW LEASE interface Table C 10 describes 2 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 10 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3263 3268 Hong Kong 2 and 4 Wire Lease Cana
55. device which is connected to an IT power distribution system Country Specific Information C 4 Country Specific Information Restricted Features Summary This section summarizes restricted features by country as follows If an entry is blank the feature is unrestricted If an entry reads Restricted the feature is not allowed If the entry says that a feature is Always x the feature is enabled and cannot be changed by the user X is also the default option If the entry shows front panel settings and AT command settings only the listed settings are allowed Settings not listed are restricted In the following example Answer can be set only to Manual AT x AAO Ring 1 AT AAI and Ring 2 AT KAA2 Other settings are restricted Setting AT Command Manual ATK AAO Ring 1 ATK AAI Ring 2 AT AA2 NOTE Refer to later sections in this appendix for information on using the modem in the U S A Country Specific Information C 5 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Feature Australia Austria Belgium Canada ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted in 3265 6 Restricted in all models Restricted in 3268 ATX Always 4 ATX4 Call Progress AT amp D7 Restricted 108 2 Bsy AT amp G Always 1800 AT amp G1 550 AT amp GI Guard Tone in 3265 67 1800 AT amp G2 in 3266 8 550 AT amp GI 1800 AT am
56. dial line and falls back to lower speeds if required After an hour the modem returns to the leased line With Option Set 4 the modem provides the network timing Clock Internal Select a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE using DTE Rate AT DE Refer to the description in Appendix A Configuring the Modem 4 9 Wedpo oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem In this option set the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation The modems default to Fast Call Lv13 and use LAPM error correction with modified V 42bis data compression Enable Option Set 4 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT KSM is set the same in both modems Refer to 326X V 32bis and 326XFAST Modem Application Examples below If you operate your modems in leased line mode with Option Set 4 and one modem has software Revision 7 8 or 7 9 set the Fast Call parameter AT k FC Modulation Opts Menu to Off in both modems Configuring an Option Set This section describes how to configure and save an option set From the Modem Front Panel 1 Read Preparing for Operation earlier in this chapter 2 Identify the option set for your application The default is Option Set 1 3 Display SELECT OPTIONS on the front panel refer to Chapter 2 to review the function of front panel control keys 4 Press wr until the modem displays SELECT OPTIONS n where n 1 4 5 Press to select an option set The m
57. does not look for a dial tone Instead the modem goes off hook and waits for the number of seconds specified by S Register 6 before blind dialing a telephone number if Blind Dial is set to S6 AT BD2 This S Register does not affect the wait dial modifiers W w or S Register 7 Wait for Data Carrier Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 30 Range to 255 seconds If Call Timeout AT KTT is set to S7 the value of S Register 7 determines the number of seconds that the modem waits for a carrier signal from the remote modem after dialing or answering a call S Register 7 also affects the dial modifiers W w and Dial Modifier If Call Timeout AT TT is set to S7 the value of S Register 7 determines the length of time for which the dial modifier instructs the modem to detect five seconds of silence Dial Modifier W w and If the Dial Wait option AT DD is set to S7 the value of S Register 7 determines the value of the dial wait modifier The dial wait modifier determines how long the modem waits for a second dial tone after the modem has dialed a number 5 12 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface S Register 8 Pause Time for Pause Delay Dial Modifiers Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 2 Range 0 to 255 seconds This S Register determines how many seconds the modem pauses while dialing when it encounter
58. end compressing and then transmitting the data at the slower DCE rate and decompressing the data at the receiving side The compression algorithm is derived from theV 42bis data compression algorithm SDC only applies when synchronous data is framed in HDLC SDLC like format A point to point second tier circuit directly connected back to back to the remote modem of the first tier circuit The connection is made using a DCE DTE crossover cable A technique that adjusts modems to current telephone line conditions The transmitting modem sends a special training sequence to the receiving modem which makes necessary adjustments for line conditions Bits per second passing over the telephone line or other communications circuitry A circuit consisting of one pair of wires See ITU V 22bis See ITU V 24 See ITU V 25bis See ITU V 32 See ITU V 32bis See ITU TS V 34 See ITU V 42 See ITU V 42bis Return Procedures Contents Equipment Return Procedures sess 2 Expiration of Lease 5 e RE e eed 2 Factory Repair 3 activator ettet pd ettet 2 Packaging Guidelines for Equipment Return eee 2 Return Procedures 1 The following sections apply to U S A customers only Other customers with questions or concerns regarding return procedures should contact their Telenetics subsidiary or distributor Equipment Return Procedures If you have questions about equipment return procedures
59. if DSR is not configured for the High setting If the modem is using error correction the error correction link handshake takes place after the modulation mode handshake and before DCD if DCD is not configured for the High setting transitions from off to on This command causes the modem to answer a call regardless of the contents of S Register 0 Ring Count to Answer On If the ATA command is issued while the modem is in escape mode or in remote configuration the modem responds with ERROR ATD Dial To dial directly from the keyboard enter ATD followed by the number you want to dial For example ATD1 617 555 1212 lt CR gt The ATD command causes the modem to go off hook dial the number and execute all dial modifiers in the dial string The type of call progress message you see is controlled by the Call Progress ATX setting The modem can dial up to 50 characters including spaces In originate mode if theATD command is issued without a phone number the modem goes off hook Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 7 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU If ATD is issued while the modem is in escape mode or remote configuration the modem responds with ERROR NOTE Any invalid characters inserted into the dial string will be ignored ATH Hang Up Settings 0 Modem hangs up 1 Busy Out the modem Format ATHn CR You may hang up the modem after entering the online escape mode by typing ATH or ATHO T
60. modem compensate when an async DTE sends data to the modem faster than specified ATX OSO 1 The modem compensates for DTE overspeed up to 1 0 AT OS1 2 5 The modem compensates for DTE overspeed up to 2 5 Password Enable Disable Password Protection Enables and disables the Password function Once you have enabled the Password function set protection in order to lock the modem seeAT K PF AT zk PEO Disable Disables the Password function ATX PEI Enable Enables the Password function ATK PF Set Protection Lets you set protection to lock the modem Refer to AT ZE PN for details ATK PN Unlock Pass If you know your password to unlock a password protected modem and gain access to all word Protection modem functions use the AT SE PNxxxx command where xxxx is the password If you forget your password you can regain access to all modem functions by performing the following procedure IMPORTANT When you unlock a modem with this procedure option settings and telephone numbers are deleted from modem memory Before using the modem again reconfigure option settings and re enter stored telephone numbers 1 Close Switch 4 on the rear panel set it to down position SeeTabl eA 6 for details 2 In the Status Option Sets Dialing menu press P until Reinit Memory displays 3 When you press the modem displays Reinit All Mem 4 Press again The modem displays 326x Initial 5 The modem is now reset to factory default settings and all electronic telep
61. not occur in a particular installation If it does you may be required at your own expense to take whatever measures are necessary to correct the situation Interference to radio or television reception can be determined by turning the equipment off and on If interference is present try the following Reorient the receiving antenna Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver Move the equipment away from the receiver Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver are on different branch circuits Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician You may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 Country Specific Information C 37 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Dial Line Jack Types The Federal Communication Commission FCC is a telecommunications and standards organization that specifies a series of registered jacks for use with a dial line network or General Switched Telephone Network sometimes referred to as PSTN These jacks are designated as RJxxx type jacks where RJ means Registered Jack and xxx specifies the jack series For example RJ11 indicates a registered jack from series 11 Sometimes the jack designation is followed by a letter RJ11C t
62. off numbers can be dialed from a telephone Once an answer tone is heard the telephone is hung up and DTR is raised the modems connect and send data sychronously Pulse Cycle Pulse Cycle AT amp PO 40 The make break ratio is 40 60 AT amp P1 33 The make break ratio is 33 5 66 5 AT amp P2 38 The make break ratio is 38 5 61 5 Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 11 92uaJ9Jeg Joinb uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description CTS CTS Control Determines how the modem sets the CTS signal The modem signals the DTE with CTS on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 5 V 24 Circuit 106 The CTS Signal discussed here is the state of the CTS signal after the setting of the modem sRTS option has been followed For CTS to follow the RTS signal from the DTE set the modem RTS Normal AT amp RO AsyncSync CTS is on in asynchronous mode CTS is off in synchronous ACU mode If the data transfer AT KCT3 mode is synchronous CTS is off during training retraining and follows RTS in data mode When CTS follows RTS in data mode the setting of the RTS CTS Delay option applies if Mode Direct AT amp R1 CTS High CTS remains high at all times Use this option with RTS CTS or DTR CTS Flow control AT KCTO DSR DSR Control
63. option is not accessible from the front panel or AT ACU and NMS displays only when selected by an NMS ATK ZC12 Rmt Ind The answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored at the specified phone number index provided by the remote user 1 9 If the remote device does not provide a callback index the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling back if AT ZRO Rmt Num Rqrd Off is set DialRstrct Dial Restricted This command defines dial command limitations AT KZDO Off No dial restrictions exist ATKZD1 Lvll The auto redial command is not allowed The A command is not allowed if the previous command was a dial command In both cases the modem reports an ERROR message to the DTE AT KZD2 Lv12 Lv12 has the same function as Lvl1 In addition only stored phone numbers may be dialed The ATD V 25bis CRN LPDA2 Hex 21 and the front panel Enter Then Dial options are not allowed ATKZI Enter Group Enter Access Security Group Password PW Lets you enter the password that your modem uses for access security Enter AT Ze ZIx CR where x maximum 10 characters minimum one character From the front panel enter alphanumeric characters NOTE For a detailed description of the modem s access security and call features refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Tone Select Tones with Access Security Controls the type of tones used by your modem to alert the calle
64. s operation The modem is shipped from the factory with all switches in the Off up position DIP switch selections cannot be overridden using the remote front panel configuration DIAL LINE PHONE EEE 10N6 Lm Factory Preset 6 Position DIP T T T T T switches in Off up position 123456 The switches are numbered from left to right 1 to 6 Tabl eA 6 lists the switches and explains their function NOTE For information on the DIP switch on 3262 3263 3267 and 3268 Modem cards see the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with your modem s backplane Table A 6 Rear Panel Switches Switch Number Setting Function 1 Off up EIA TIA 232 D Pin 23 is set for data rate input Setting Switch 1 to this position has no effect on modem operation NOTE When operating with a V 35 electrical interface leave switch S1 in the off up position at all times 2 On down EIA TIA 232 D Pin 23 is set as a data indicator Off up Busy Out select A signal on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 makes the modem appear busy to incoming calls NOTES 1 You must set DTE Pin 25 Busy AT KLT TERMINAL OPT s category to enable Busy Out Select 2 The AT amp J Telco option command must be set to RJ4MB On down Test Indicator Signal V 24 Circuit 142 Select The modem signals to the terminal on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 V 24 Circuit 142 when a test is in progress NOTES 1 You must set DTE Pin 25 2
65. telephone network PSTN provided by British Telecommunications PLC or Hull City Council Telephone Department The modem is suitable for household office and general indoor use It is not suitable for use as an extension to a pay phone shared service or 1 1 carrier systems The modem has been approved for the use of the following facilities Loop disconnect and MF signaling Auto answer Auto calling You may connect the modem to a BT line that has loop disconnect or MF signaling Ringer Equivalence Number REN This modem has a REN value of 3 The REN is a customer guide that indicates in approximate terms the maximum number of items that may be connected simultaneously to a telephone line The REN obtained by summing the REN values of each of the items of apparatus connected to the exchange line should not exceed 4 This value includes BT provided instruments each of which is assumed to have a REN of 1 0 unless otherwise marked Country Specific Information C 33 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Compliance with BABT SITS 83 08 A Clause 1 2 The modem cannot allow Auto Call using 999 or other PABX emergency numbers Modes other than 1 2 or 3 should not be used on the BT PSTN This modem is a mode 1 device Check the numbers entered during the Auto Call setup phase prior to dialing Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 5 2 The modem should not be used in conjunction with other series co
66. the V 34 modulation mode with the ARS option disabled AT APO the modem selects the optimum data rate that can be supported as determined by the line probing feature described above on the first connection With ARS disabled the modem does not automatically fall back when line conditions deteriorate NOTE When external timing is selected configure the modem so that the minimum rate is equal to the maximum rate This will force the modems to come up at a specific data rate only AT ARO ATARI Asym Rate Off On V 34 Asymmetric Rate Controls whether the modem permits different transmit and receive DCE rates Asymmetric Rate ATX ASO Ans Rest LL Fail Answer In Restoral Controls whether the modem answers a call on the dial line while connected to the leased line When connected on a leased line the modem answers an incoming call only if the leased line fails Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 14 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT K ASI Always A dial call is always answered As soon as the dial call is answered the leased line connection is dropped with auto answering the leased line is dropped after the correct number of rings If training on the dial line fails the modem returns to the
67. the modem is configured forV 25bis and V25Form Charsync it sends a continuous stream of SYN synchronizing Characters on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 when it has no messages to send If V25Form Bitsync it sends continuous flags 7E hexadecimal when it has no messages to send If the modem is configured for LPDA2 it sends continuous flags 7E hexadecimal when it does not have a message to send V25 Resp When using the V 25bis ACU the modem always indicates a valid connection after the local modem and remote modem switch to data mode You can receive an indication of call progress at your DTE The V25 Resp option chooses the response you receive V25bis The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message once an answer back tone is received from the remote modem V25rate The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message followed by the data rate once the modem switches to data mode VALOnly The modem sends a VAL message when the modems switch to data mode V25 Resp The modem does not send a message to the DTE LPDA2 Addr Lets you select the modem s address See Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details LPDA2 ID Allows the modem type to be returned in the data field response field 326X Sends 3260 in data response 17855 Sends 7855 in data response LPDA2 Det Enab LPDA2 commands are recognized in the data stream and the commands are process
68. used allowing less data to accumulate in the modem When the SDC modem is operating in synchronous reliable mode selecting Buffers Reduced reduces throughput delay while transmitting data Netwrk Comp Network Compensation Lets you enhance modem performance reliability when operating with network equipment AT K NCO Off Off should be selected when making most normal connections within a continent ATZENCT Lvl1 Select Lvl1 if the modem is experiencing performance problems when connected to a line terminating equipment via a short loop having low loop loss with below normal receive signal levels for example when operating behind a low grade PBX NOTE This option limits the maximum DCE data rate to 21 600 bps AT ENC2 Lv12 Lvl2 is recommended when performance problems are encountered making intercontinental calls NOTE This selection limits the maximum DCE data rate to 19 200 bps When operating in an environment where the conditions described for Lvl1 and LvI2 exist Lvl2 is recommended to enhance performance AT END View Phone View Stored Telephone Numbers n Lets you view the telephone numbers stored in the modem s nine telephone book addresses Enter ATzE ND lt CR gt Ext Cntrl External Control Lets you select which pin the ATK OP Ext Select command responds to NOTE If AT ZS OP is set to O this command has no effect AT OCO Pin 14 Loads an option set based on the transition of Pin 14 This setting overrides the AT KRE Res
69. used in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom LINE Ss eee DTE OUT IN Figure C 9 View C Rear Panel Layout 3266 Leased Line with Dial Restoral For an Illustration of the Enclosure Card Backplane Refer to the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with the backplane Country Specific Information C 17 uoneuuoju oyi2eds Anuno Country Specific Information Rear Panel Interface Pinouts This section shows the rear panel interface pinouts for the modem stand alone models 3260 3261 3265 and 3266 and enclosure card models 3262 3263 3267 and 3268 Standalone Models 3260 65 and 3261 66 Interface Pinouts This section shows the pinouts for the standalone modem s rear panel connectors Dial Line Interface Models 3260 3265 Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE interface on the modem s rear panel Table C 1 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts Table C 1 Dial Line Interface Models 3260 3265 Dial Line Canada Hong Kong Germany All Other Connector Pin U S A United Kingdom Austria Countries 1 MB Not Used LA Not Used 2 MBI Telset B Not Used Not Used 3 MI Bell Shunt Ring Indicator Telset Ring 4 Ring Not Used LB Ring 5 Tip Telset A b2 Tip 6 MIC Not Used Not Used Telset Tip T PR Not Used Not Used 8 PC a2 Not Used Refer to Canada U S A country specific sections for rear pan
70. value of S Register 26 Pause Delay Pause Delay Makes the modem pause when it encounters modifiers in a dial string or on the command line AT DPO 3 Pause delay is 3 seconds ATK DPI 6 Pause delay is 6 seconds AT DP2 9 Pause delay is 9 seconds AT gt K DP3 12 Pause delay is 12 seconds ATK DP4 S8 Pause delay is determined by S Register 8 See the S Registers section in Chapter 5 Auto Redial Auto Redial Determines how many times the modem redials a failed call The modem waits for a country specific time between redials If the AT ZE LN option is enabled the modem dials all of the linked numbers before redialing ATK DRO Off The modem does not redial an unsuccessful call AT zs Dn n The modem redials an unsuccessful call n times n 1 15 AT DSnor Dial From Dialing a Stored Telephone number n 1 9 ATK DS n Stored See the ATDS description earlier for information on using this command n DTR Delay DTR Delay Determines how long the modem waits after connecting to the dial line before examining the DTR signal from the DTE If the DTR signal is low the modem disconnects This feature is used when AT Form SyncData or V25 Form AsynSync AT DTO 825 The modem waits for the time specified by S Register 25 before examining DTR ATKDT1 10 sec The modem waits 10 seconds before examining DTR ATK DT2 15 sec The modem waits 15 seconds before examining DTR EC Error Correction The AT EC EC command determines which error correction pr
71. xB Operating at V 34 DTE Rates To operate V 34 or V 34 SDC modems at DTE rates greater than 19 2 kbps you must use cables that can handle the higher data rates Refer to Appendix B for instructions on determining the correct cables to use Ferrite Cylinders Ferrite cylinders or beads installed on cables filter out line disturbances They are required on some 326X models in some countries as described in this section Caution Install cables with the ferrite end adjacent to the modem The ferrite cylinder ensures that the unit operates in compliance with FCC RFI requirements Models 3261 and 3266 Dial Line Connections Two telephone cables with ferrite cylinders are included in the Model 3261 U S A and the 3266 Canada Germany U K and Japan accessory kit Connect the cables from the modem to 6 or 8 conductor dial line connections Install the telephone cable Figure 2 4 shows the proper orientation Figure 2 8 in the next section shows how to connect the 3261 3266 modem Dial Line Cable To Wall Jack Ferrite Figure 2 4 Attaching Ferrite Cable to the Modem Models 3267 and 3268 Ferrite cylinders are required on Both dial line cables and on DTE cables on the 3267 V 34 Modem Both audio leased or dial cables and on DTE cables on the 3268 V 34 Modem Power cables on Modular Nest enclosures populated with 3267 and 3268 V 34 Modems Network management cables on Modular Nest enclosures p
72. 00 display Max Rate 7200 Press The display flashes three times and the colon changes to an equals sign The new option is temporarily saved and Max Rate 7200 displays 3 Step across the Status Option Sets Dialing menu by pressing p until you see Save Changes n 4 Use the we key to display the option set number where you want the changes saved and then press The modem displays Saving Options 5 After a few seconds the modifications are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory and the modem displays SAVE COMPLETED 6 Do not turn off modem power until SAVE COMPLETED appears Option Set Defaults Table 4 3 summarizes option set defaults for 326X V 32bis and 326XV 34 modems Table 4 4 summarizes option set parameter defaults for 326X V 34 SDC modems Table 4 3 Option Set Defaults 326X V 32bis and 326X V 34 Modems Option Set 4 Option Set 4 Parameter Option Set 1 Option Set 2 Option Set 3 3260 62 65 67 3261 63 66 68 MOD OPT S Line Dial Dial Dial Dial 2W Lease Mod V 32bis Auto V 32bis Auto V 32bis Auto V 32bis Auto V 32bis Auto V 34 Auto V 34 Auto V 34 Auto V 34 Auto V 34 Auto Auto Type CCITT CCITT CCITT CCITT CCITT Low Speed Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Max Rate 14 4 33 6 14 4 33 6 14 4 33 6 14 4 33 6 14 4 33 6 Min Rate 300 300 300 300 300 V 34 Asym none On none On none On none On none On Fast Call Off Off Off Off Off Ad
73. 31 2 and 33 6 kbps Baud Rate 2400 2743 3000 3200 and 3429 Some baud rates do not support all data rates Carrier Frequency 1600 1646 1800 1829 1920 1959 and 2000 Hz Some baud rates do not support all carrier frequencies Modulation V 34 is a four dimensional trellis coded modulation standard that uses precoding and pre emphasis equalization schemes Compatibility in V 34 Modulation Mode 326X FAST Series Modems operating in V 34 Auto modulation mode are compatible with modems that do not support theV 34 modulation mode by automatically negotiating the highest common modulation mode e g V 32bis V 90 Compatibility Release 8 1 software enables 326X modems to operate with V 90 modems in dial up connections With this software 326X modems can communicate with V 90 modems and negotiate V 34 rates The release does not provide 56kbps rates for 326X modems nor 326X rates higher than the V 34 33 6 kbps standard An upgrade to 8 1 is not required for modems used only in leased line applications Data Compression SDC Feature The 326X FAST Series Modem is available in a synchronous data compression SDC model 326XFAST products offer all the features of the 326X FAST family plus synchronous DTE rates at 72 0 kbps or higher The 326X FAST SDC Modem is an ideal alternative to costly digital services Whether your application requires dedicated bandwidth bandwidth on demand synchronous dial up or dial backup the
74. 326X SDC provides optimum throughput for all HDLC SDLC like environments such as X 25 Systems Networking Architecture SNA Statistical Multiplexer and Router networks Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the Modem for details The synchronous data compression feature in the 326XFAST SDC Modem is Tele netics proprietary technology Automode Multimode Feature Using Automode Multimode the modem can automatically negotiate the highest common modulation speed within a modulation mode with another modem About the Modem 1 7 wapo eui 1noqy About the Modem Remote Configuration Using the local front panel an NMS or local modem AT ACU you can configure a remote modem You can also read the remote modem s status snapshots and receive its configuration summary on a front panel or async terminal Error Correction and Data Compression Security The modem provides error correction and data compression in accordance with the V 42 and V 42bis ITU TS recommendation With V 42 modems automatically determine whether to use Microcom Networking Protocol MNP Level 4 or Link Access Procedure for Modems LAPM for error correction Depending on the scheme negotiated the modem uses MNP Level 5 orV 42bis data compression The SDC modem uses LAPM with Telenetics proprietary data compression technology The modem provides access security at two levels Front panel Modem access Front panel security lets you passwo
75. 326XFAST SDC Modem Application Examples esses 4 21 SDC Pre Dpera oR Noles assensu iust erPn i pe SR FEE Roni ER eoa 4 21 Configuring the Modem for SDC Operation eese 4 22 SDC Sample Apnplicatic uuu edere ceto irs mice kcisti sels o FUE a Ur OO RO GOES 4 22 LR 4 28 LOCO uus ior AM LR UM gon e n EV ADR EEN 4 28 When Remote Access Reset Is Disabled 1 ette 4 28 Configuring the Modem 4 1 uepo y oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Overview This chapter explains how to configure the modem in conjunction with Chapter 3 Getting Started Read Chapter 3 before continuing Then select an option If the application requires a communications software package read the section Communications Software Package Operating Notes f you have previously installed the 326X in another application the section Preparing for Operation explains how to reinitialize the modem memory so it can be installed in a new application To configure quickly the 326X Series Modem offers four preconfigured option sets Each option set is tailored for an application and stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory Refer to the section Configuration Option Sets to determine if an option set is appropriate for your application The following two sections provide examples of common 326X applications and tell you how to configure the modem for each application These sections will help you to confi
76. 4 24 0 The DTE port is configured for 24 000 bps AT zk DE25 26 4 The DTE port is configured for 26 400 bps ATK DE26 28 8 The DTE port is configured for 28 800 bps AT KDEI5 38 4 The DTE port is configured for 38 400 bps Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 17 e2ueJoJog oinp uoneanBiuo2 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATK DE23 48 0 The DTE port is configured for 48 000 bps Available with SDC feature only AT DE24 56 0 The DTE port is configured for 56 000 bps Available with SDC feature only ATK DE16 57 6 The DTE port is configured for 57 600 bps ATK DEI 64 0 The DTE port is configured for 64 000 bps Available with SDC feature only AT KDEI18 72 0 The DTE port is configured for 72 000 bps Available with SDC feature only ATK DE19 76 8 The DTE port is configured for 76 800 bps ATK DE20 96 0 The DTE port is configured for 96 000 bps AT DE21 115 2 The DTE port is configured for 115 200 bps ATK DE28 128 0 The DTE port is configured for 128 000 bps AT DE22 Auto The modem uses the autobaud feature to determine the rate at which to operate For details see Chapter 5 NOTE The Autobaud feature is not supported in synchronous operating modes When configured for synchronous ope
77. 4MB supporting the exclusion key feature Country Specific Information C 41 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Telco Option AT amp J Telco displays only on U S A and Canadian 326X Series Modems It is used to select the RJ jack type Telco corresponds to the AT amp J command as follows Option Setting AT Command RJ11C 0 1 RJ45S 2 RJ16C 3 RJAMB 4 Declaring The Jack Type Once 326x Ready displays you must declare the jack type you used to connect your modem to the dial leased line so that the modem recognizes this connection see Tables C 16 or C 18 You can declare the jack type as follows 1 Press yw until TELCO OPT S is displayed 2 Use ly to move through the TELCO OPT S menu until Telco jack type is displayed For example you may see Telco RJ16C in the display 3 Press yy until you see the jack type you used to connect your modem to the dial leased line For example you can select Telco RJ11C 4 Press In this example Telco RJ11C is displayed You have now declared to the modem the jack type you are using If this is the first time you are installing the modem the modem is set factory default for connection to an RJ11C permissive jack Installation is complete If this is not a first time installation connect the modem to an RJ45S programmable jack and set the Telco option for this jack type To use a programmable jack contact your telephone company to arrange for installation NOTE You c
78. 5 Autobaud feature 5 5 automatic call units ACUs 1 2 Automode multimode feature 1 7 Avertissement xvi BABT regulations Hong Kong C 32 backplanes 2 5 Backspace character S Register 5 5 12 bandwidth on deman d4 16 Belgium C 6 Bell 801C ACU 3 10 Besondere Hinweise Beschreibung xvi Blind dialing Denmark C 32 blind dialin g5 12 bridge 4 16 British Telecom C 36 Buffer delay during disconnec t5 16 bulletin board 4 16 BUSY message A 41 busy out 5 8 A 44 C cables 2 4 Cabling daisy chain 2 13 NMS 2 13 Cabling overview Figure 2 5 3260 6 52 12 Figure 2 6 3261 6 62 12 Call establishment methods 3 10 Call progress and the ATD command 5 7 Canada C 6 C 28 card modem 2 2 card modems in enclosure 2 14 Carrier loss hang up delay S Register 10 5 13 central site 4 16 change S Register value 5 10 Character formats for autobaud 5 5 Index 1 ci rcuit quality monitoring system CQMS 1 8 cluster controller 4 16 COM port 6 2 command line 5 4 Command mode leaving 5 8 command mode 5 3 communications softwar e3 9 4 2 5 2 6 2 Communications software equipment needed 2 4 computer connectors 2 5 Configuration options selecting from front panel 3 5 Configuration options list A 2 configure a modem 5 3 configure and operate the modem 3 2 CONNECT 1200 message A 41 connector pinouts B 6 Connectors 2 5 country regulatory agencies 1 9 Czech Republic C 7 D data carrier 5 13 data compression A 43 data encoding 4 21 d
79. 60 3265 Modem Rear Panel Layout Installing the Modem 2 5 w poN y PBumeisu Installing the Modem RA d B 2 6 Installing the Modem LEASE DIAL PHONE LINE LINE 10N6 a OUT l T T T T T T Factory Preset 6 Position 12345 6 DIPs are Off Up Figure 2 3 3261 3266 Modem Rear Panel Layout Electrical Interfaces EIA TIA 232 and ITU TS V 35 Caution Ensure that the electrical interfaces of the equipment you connect to the modem are compatible Incompatible interfaces may seriously damage the modem Telenetics makes no guarantee of the equipment s integrity if you do not ensure that compatible interfaces are used If your DTE has a different interface you will need an external converter cable 326X Series Modems have an EIA TIA 232 EIA TIA 562 electrical interface for connection to external equipment For compatibility with DTEs that have a V 35 interface the V 34 SDC Modem is also available with the optional ITU TS V 35 Recommendation electrical interface The rear panel DTE port is configured at the factory for either interface Both interfaces are not available in a unit Regardless of the interface external DTEs are connected through the modem s rear panel DTE port NOTE When operating with the V 35 interface DIP switch S1 must be set to the off up position see Figure 2 2 or 2 3 To purchase a compatible cable consult Appendi
80. 8000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 64000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE EC xxx DC yyy 30 31 35 32 36 37 38 34 39 41 84 85 87 88 42 82 83 76 77 78 79 80 81 86 NOTES 1 When CONNECT messages are displayed xxx indicates which error correction scheme LAPM or MNP 1 4 the modems are using and yyy indicates which data compression scheme V 42bis or MNP 5 the modems are using 2 When a reliable connection has been established with the remote modem the RELIABLE result code is displayed only when the Mode option under the EC DC OPT S menu is configured for Reliable AT SM2 Auto Rel AT ESM3 or Spd AutoRel AT KSMA Also the Rel Msg option under the ACU OPT S menu must be set for Long AT XC2 or Short AT XC1 Also you receive error correction and data compression information in your result code only when the Rel Msg option is set to Long Configuration Quick Reference A 43 9o2u9JeJoeu XoInp uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference Configuring the Modem s Dual In line Package DIP Switches The standalone modem has a 6 position DIP switch that lets you hard configure certain aspects of the modem
81. A RJ16C CA11A 1 N C N C N C N C N C 2 N C N C N C N C N C 3 MI X X X Not Used 4 Ring X X X X 5 Tip X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 N C N C N C N C N C 8 N C N C N C N C N C N C z Not Connected X active signal Telco Option AT amp J Telco displays only on U S A and Canadian 326X Series Modems It is used to select the RJ jack type Telco corresponds to the AT amp J command as follows Front Panel AT Command Option Setting Option Setting RJ11C 0 1 RJ45S 2 RJ16C 3 RJ4MB 4 Country Specific Information C 31 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Denmark Blind Dialing 326X Series Modem users in Denmark must comply with the requirements in the Regulation Regarding Teleterminal Equipment No 882 October 29 1992 available from the Danish Minister of Communications The setup of the modem must comply exactly with the restrictions within this Denmark section and as specified in the Restricted Features Summary in this guide The factory default settings are in accordance with this requirement and the modem is shipped from Telenetics with compliant settings Hong Kong and United Kingdom BABT Regulations The following sections outline the BABT regulations as they relate to Telenetics 3265 and 3266 Modem operation in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 3 This modem is not suitable for use with circuits employing British Telecommunications
82. AT KBD2 AT BD1 AT KCD Loss Dis AT EDD 4 sec AT KDD2 3sec AT XDD1I 2 sec AT KDDI 15 sec AT Ze Dis Dial Wait 6 sec AT KDD3 4sec AT DD2 4sec AT KDD2 30sec AT Ze DD7 15 sec AT KDDS5 6sec AT DD3 6 sec AT KDD3 40 sec AT e DD Using S7 AT Ze DD9 Using S7 AT KDD9 AT DP Always 3 sec Pause Delay AT ZS DR Off AT KDRO Off AT KDRO Off AT gt K DRO Auto Redial 1 AT KDRI 1 AT KDRI 1 AT KDRI 2 AT EDR2 AT KDR2 M 3 AT gt K DR3 8 AT gt KDR8 4 AT DR4 ATLL Restricted LAL Busy Out AT LN Restricted DTE Pin 25 ATK TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Length ATK TLO AT TLO AT TLO ATK TLO AT TT 30 sec AT KTTO 30 sec AT TTO 30sec AT Ze Call Timeout Using S7 AT KTT5 45 sec ATXTT1 60 sec AT TT 90 sec AT KTT2 Using S7 AT KTTS ATK PT Dial Auto Dial Restricted DL TX Level Always 9 dBm Set to 15dBm adjustable Always 9 dBm Always 6dBm from 0 to 15 dBm LL TX Level Always 13 dBm Set to OdBm adj ustable Always 0 dBm Always 6dBm from 0 to 15 dBm Country Specific Information C 9 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Feature Norway Portugal South Africa Spain ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted in all models Restricted in all models ATX Always 4 ATX4 Call Progress AT amp D7 Restricted Restricted 108 2 Bsy AT amp G Restricted Always 1800 AT amp G1 Guard Tone Model
83. AT KDA is enabled the modem dials the number specified If Default Dial is disabled the modem refers to the Modulation Mode option AT KMM If set to Answer the modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer DTR transitions govern how the modem answers and disconnects calls All options in the ACU OPT S category are set for a typical synchronous DTE The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 Auto modulation mode This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Option Set 4 Sync Leased Line with Dial Restoral No ACU Models 3261 63 66 68 Option Set 4 uses the modem s leased line restoral feature With this option set the modem operates primarily on a leased line unless that line fails If so the modem automatically restores the connection over a single dial line You must install a 326XFAST SDC Modem at both ends of the leased line to implement restoral Option Set 4 configures the modem for a general restoral application see Table 4 2 The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 Auto modulation mode This setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates If restoral criteria are met the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the public switched telephone network PSTN over a single dial line At that time the modem attempts to run at 28 8 kbps over the
84. ATDn Enter Then Dial Dialing an Unstored Telephone Number n phone number Lets you dial a telephone number of up to 50 characters without storing it in the modem s telephone book To dial a number usingAT commands enterATD followed by the telephone number and a carriage return Example ATD5551234 CR ATDSn Dial From Dialing a Stored Telephone number n 1 9 ATDS n or Stored n Dial telephone number stored in address n Before using this option enter a telephone number AT KDSn into the modem address book See AT amp Z AT ZE CN to learn how to enter telephone numbers If you enter ATDS or ATDS without a number following the modem dials the number in ATK DS n Address 1 To dial a number usingAT Commands enterATDS ATDS orAT DS followed by the telephone book address number and a carriage return For example ATDS2 lt CR gt NOTE You can include dial modifiers to instruct the modem how and when to dial a call The dial modifiers used with the AT ACU are described in Table A 4 Async Echo Asynchronous Echo ATEO Off The modem does not echo asynchronous commands to the DTE ATEI On The modem echoes asynchronous commands to the DTE TEST Busy Out Test ATHO End Test If busy out is enabled ATHO disconnects the busy out condition In escape mode modem has transitioned to command state from data state ATHO disconnects the modem ATH1 Busy Out Makes the modem appear busy to incoming calls Gray shading indicates country spe
85. Analog Loopback LAL or Remote Digital Loopback RDL test when troubleshooting Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 11 s nould eu Ul Appendix C Country Specific Information Contents eier ecc MN ES C 3 Werner ci Tm C 3 oollha NOES casei bb EAR C 4 Restricted Features Ais teg te bi nc UE ect ASTA un UR pb be ne Ra HU RE C 5 E C 12 Standalone Modem Rear Panel Views entr tette rentrer va C 12 2200 Pidi Only WEE C 13 3261 Modem Rear View Leased Line Dial Restoral C 13 320a Pial Ony vingt I A C 14 3266 Modem Leased Line with Dial Restoral sssses C 16 Rear Pace Interface Pi uos sueci on rdum nodos iode ient up DU boten capitan C 18 Standalone Models 3260 65 and 3261 66 Interface Pinouts C 18 Card Models 3262 67 3263 68 Backplane Interface Pinouts C 21 Delayed aid Were NNI m C 23 Avgitala Delayed Cal Liat 4i4eicosc cuo citron ib e D adc bc E ni iue C 23 Austria Forbidden Call LASS 5s 2 trn hore pt ducc bie Ue ned saas C 24 Belgnum Delayed E C 24 Finlng Delayod Call Lists arnein ai C 25 France Delayed and Forbidden Call Lists sss C 25 Hong Kong Doelayed Call LISIS ascia rcer RE Eae VAS c EAR Pe RU UARE EY C 26 E ER NEE C 26 Netherlands Delayed Call LISIS iere rit rette bo ven Ue b Egeter C 27 Nocqay Delayed Call BE C 27 Spam Dolaved Call Lists EE C 28 Other Counry Specilie In
86. C 8 N C N C N C N C N C N C Not Connected Country Specific Information C 39 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information 3261 Modem Table C 18 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts for RJ jack types X indicates the signal is active Table C 18 DIAL LINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation PHONE Connector PHONE Jack TELCO Jack Selection Pin No Function RJ4MB HJ45S RJ16C RJ11C 1 MB X Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 MBI X Not Used Not Used Not Used 3 MI X X X Not Used 4 Ring X X X X 5 Tip X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 PR X X Not Used Not Used 8 PC X X Not Used Not Used Table C 19 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types X indicates the signal is active Table C 19 PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation PHONE Connector PHONE Jack TELCO Jack Selection Pin No Function RJ4MB RJ45S RJ16C RJ11C 1 N C N C N C N C N C 2 N C N C N C N C N C 3 MI x x X Not Used 4 Ring X X X x 5 Tip x x x X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 N C N C N C N C N C 8 N C N C N C N C N C N C Not Connected C 40 Country Specific Information Dial and Leased LineTransmit Levels Dial Line Transmit Level Your 3260 3261 3262 or 3263 Modem does not support the DL TX option You select the dial line transmit level through the Telco option in the TELCO OPT s category Use the following as a guide Telco Jack Selection Dial Transmit Level RJ11C Permissive 9 dBm
87. CT lt Rate gt BUSY and NO DIAL TONE result codes are used Longspace Longspace Disconnect ATYO Off The modem does not disconnect when it receives space longer than 1 6 seconds When terminating a call the modem does not send continuous space for 4 seconds ATY1 On The modem disconnects when it receives space longer than 1 6 seconds When terminating a call the modem sends continuous space for 4 seconds Select Options Selecting an Option Set The new option set takes effect immediately ATZO ATZ1 l The modem uses Option Set 1 ATZ2 2 The modem uses Option Set 2 ATZ3 3 The modem uses Option Set 3 ATZ4 4 The modem uses Option Set 4 NOTE The modem disconnects from the line when ATZ is entered Any test in progress is terminated Since anyAT command that followsATZ is ignored by the modem ensure that ATZ is the last command entered in a command string Use the AT amp Y command to select the option set in which the modem powers up DCD DCD Control Determines how the modem sets DCD signals The modem signals the DTE with DCD on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 8 V 24 Circuit 109 AT amp CO High DCD is always on AT amp C1 Normal DCD is off during dialing and while the modem is training with the remote modem DCD is on in data mode It is off when the modem is disconnected from the telephone line AT amp C2 ACU On DCD is on when the modem is disconnected so that terminals requiring this signal can use the ACU During dialing DCD goes off unt
88. Check the communications software package for correct communications port configuration Check that the communications software package s baud rate is set to a rate that the modem s autobaud feature supports Check modem s configuration Ensure ACU is compatible with modem s e DTE Rate AT K DE configuration ACU Form Make sure the DTE is set to a valid character format to operate the modem s autobaud feature Char Length see Chapter 5 for details on this feature Parity AT RP e If modem still does not respond after modifying Result Code ATQ configuration perform a local analog loopback LAL test Refer to the end of this chapter for details on tests supported as well as instructions for initiating tests If LAL fails contact Telenetics Customer Support or your local distributor Double echo on characters typed Check echo setting on data If both echo settings are on turn one off In some data terminal equipment and modem terminals echo is sometimes referred to as half or full duplex If this does not solve the problem contact Tele netics Customer Support or your local distributor Check the terminal setup of the communications software CALL ESTABLISHMENT Modem won t answer Check the modem s configuration e Answer AT AA Ensure that Answer is not set to Manual DTR AT amp D Set DTR High AT amp DO Troubleshooting Guide 6 3 Bunoouse qnojj Troubleshooting 326X
89. Contents Chapter 1 About the Modem eener eR T p rere rnc rten E on mer Nore Gre a rretrn tr are etter 1 2 Daley iud Operational INOUOGS EEN 1 3 Operating the Modem from the Front Patel 5 cscoscccinsiscsisaantsnescudsarcaadsaiawas 1 4 Selecting Programmed EE 1 5 Automatic Calling Interfaces ACUS sscsiccosssscssscresasasestniccosstnaaateciaaniocinonss 1 5 AT TEE 1 5 Loo E 1 5 BR var EE 1 5 Ee RE 1 6 Restore Data RE E 1 6 ITU T V 34 Compliant Modulation Mode 1 6 Synchronous Data Compression SDC Feature eee 1 7 ee E E 1 7 Bonipte EUREN usare et beet te nnn AM RD A FUR EE 1 8 Error Correction and Data Compression iiie oceano ta tak be re debet n MAR SURE 1 8 ENEE 1 8 EE 1 8 Aipu E 1 9 Troubleshooting V 54 and V 22bis Tests cccccssccseseeeeseeeeteeeeneeceeeeeeeaees 1 9 Country Specife Da OPI GEO sirine oe hid or ena i i pe CEP pa rU 1 9 NET COMPIE sesaria onn eeterre tes tree ter erate tater tener grime tet erer re 1 9 CE Regulatory Marking Directive 93 08 BEC iue cce ttt 1 9 Chapter 2 Installing the Modem TO e E 2 2 Lk E 2 3 Additonal Equipment Rerpibtedl 1er rta beret bbb b uil beri 2 4 KEE bui e mm 2 4 E E EEN 2 5 Rear Panel C ODDOCDUE E ooi Ee 2 5 Forcie C nor T 2 7 Cais the Diode ti cocus caciccot beepou abes eati AA N NORN 2 11 Connecting the Modem to a Network Management System 2 13 Tormine on i hu nomme LL T 2 14 Ee e IT rm 2 15 Akter Installing me
90. DC product The SDC modem may have the ARS feature enabled In this case ARS determines the link rate Configuring the Modem 4 23 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Figure 4 2 shows a configuration using an external A B switch Network configuration SDC Option Set 2 and operation is the same as with an internal switch To 33 6 kbps To 56 kbps Can e 326XFAST AB SDC 56 64 kbps Router DSUCSU J 7777 KEE I L5 I au NMS Network Management Channel Figure 4 2 Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral A B Switch Option Set 2 4 24 Configuring the Modem SDC Option Set 3 Sync Dial Only In a typical dial application a remote terminal dials the host for file transfers This allows remote users to dial in as needed with a higher throughput than formerly attainable over the PSTN Alternately the DTE and host Figure 4 3 could be nodal equipment e g X 25 PADs routers bridges In this configuration the SDC modems are used for remote dial up branch connectivity This is useful for remote uploading or downloading data over the PSTN as needed Select SDC Option Set 3 for either of these applications Note the following With Option Set 3 the modem provides the network timing Clock Internal Specify the speed at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the DTE Rate AT ZS DE option t
91. Determines how the modem sets the DSR signal The modem signals the DTE with DSR on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 6 V 24 Circuit 107 AT amp SO High DSR is always on AT amp S1 Normal DSR is controlled by the modem TEST Test AT amp TO End Test Ends the test currently in progress for each test listed below except retrain AT amp T1 LAL Initiates a local analog loopback test AT amp T3 LDL Initiates a local digital loopback test Accept RDL Accept RDL AT amp T4 On The local modem can be put into a remote digital loopback test AT amp T5 Off The local modem cannot be put into a remote digital loopback test AT amp T6 TEST RDL Initiates a remote digital loopback test AT amp T7 TEST RDL Pat Initiates a remote digital loopback pattern test AT amp TS TEST LAL Pat Initiates a local analog loopback pattern test Status Modem Status Display AT amp VO Long Form Lets you view modem status information on the control terminal in long form The display Status shows operating status DTE DCE rate status asymmetric rates status connect message status the data form throughput delay minimization status error correction status data compression status EIA TIA signal status disconnect reasons the software revision level and COMS parameters The long form also shows front panel options and corresponding AT commands AT amp V1 Short Form Lets you view modem status information on the control terminal in short form This displays Status a summary ofAT command set
92. Direct Buffers Regular Regular Regular EC V 42 V 42 V 42 DC Enabled Enabled Enabled Break Destruct Destruct Destruct Modem Flow On On On Delay Off Off Off EC ID Default Default Default ACU OPT S ACU Select AT None V 25b AT Form Async Async Async V25 Form Bitsync Bitsync Bitsync NoACU Form Async Sync Sync Default Dial Off Off Off Answer Country specific Country specific Country specific Async Echo On On On Char Length 10 10 10 V25 Char ASCII ASCII ASCII Sync Idle Char Char Char V25 Resp V25bis V25bis V25bis Parity V 25bis V 25bis V 25bis AT Msg Before CD Before CD Before CD Rslt Code Enable Enable Enable ResltForm Verbose Verbose Verbose Con Msg DTE Rate DTE Rate DTE Rate Rel Msg Off Off Off LPDA2 Addr FF FF FF LPDA2 ID 326X 326X 326X LPDA2 Det Enable Enable Enable Call Progress 4 4 4 V32bis Series default shown first V 34 Series default shown second 4 12 Configuring the Modem Table 4 3 Option Set Defaults 326X V 32bis and 326X V 34 Modems Continued Option Set 4 Option Set 4 Parameter Option Set 1 Option Set 2 Option Set 3 3260 62 65 67 3261 63 66 68 TERMINAL OPT S DTE Rate Auto 14 4 28 8 14 4 28 8 19 2 14 4 28 8 Flow XON XOFF XON XOFF XON XOFF XON XOFF XON XOFF Speed Conver On On On On On DTR High 108 2 108 2 Discon High RTS High Normal Normal Normal Normal CTS AsynSync Normal Normal Normal Normal RTS CTS Delay 0 0 0 0 0 DCD High Normal Normal Normal Normal RemRST DCD Codex Codex Codex
93. G Wichtig wird zur Betonung signifikanter Angaben zu Vorgehensweisen verwendet A Vorsicht Ein Vorsichtshinweis macht Sie darauf aufmerksam da Nichtbefolgung zu Software Hardware oder Datensch den f hren kann 4 Warnung Eine Warnung weist Sie darauf hin da ernsthafte K rperverletzungsgefahr besteht xvi Using the Documentation Set continued Avisos Especiales Los siguientes avisos hacen hincapi en determinada informaci n de la gu a Cada uno de ellos tiene un prop sito especial y aparecen con el formato siguiente IMPORTANTE Importante se utiliza para enfatizar cualquier informaci n de procedimiento importante Precaucion La precauci n le ofrece informaci n que de no cumplirse puede derivar en posibles dafios tanto para el software y el hardware como para ambos i Advertencia Una advertencia es un aviso importante que le advierte sobre la presencia de un inminente peligro xvii Telenetics Customer Information Introduction U S A customers who have questions about Telenetics products or services should refer to the following sections Non U S A customers should contact their local Telenetics subsidiary office or distributor Questions about Your Product Shipment If you have questions about whether your shipment is complete or about its condition upon receipt please call your nearest Telenetics representative Technical Assistance or Scheduling Service To have Tel
94. Group PW Determines if the modem can verify a received password when PW VerifyzMngr AT ZV and SECURITY the network management system is unable to perform the verification This option is not accessible from the front panel or the AT ACU It is displayed for status purposes only Disable The modem cannot verify the password Enable The modem can verify the password using its Group PW stored internally NETWK OverrideMode Determines whether your modem can be controlled by the network manager CNTL OPT S Off The network manager can attach your modem When it has attached front panel control is locked out You can display options and status in the front panel menu tree but you cannot change options If you attempt to change a setting the modem displays Net Man Attached On The network manager cannot attach your modem NC Address Lets you set the modem s network control address This is the address that modems use with the SET RMT LL ADDR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR functions The range of addresses is 0 to 254 To set a network control address see Performing Numeric Entry in this appendix NC PortRate Set the NC Port Rate option to match the speed of your network manager This option controls the speed of the NC ports on your modem s rear panel 75 Configures the network control port for speeds indicated in bits per second bps 110 150 1200 2400 4800 9600 Pass Thru The modem uses an in band secondary channel to pass network manag
95. ID displays Press SWPart x displays The rightmost two digits show the revision level Option Settings Up to date configuration worksheet see the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Site ID Assigned to the customer site by Telenetics at first service call Customer should store the ID once assigned Application type Leased line with or without dial restoral or dial Also specify the data transfer protocol asynchronous direct synchronous or synchronous data compression SDC mode Connected hardware DTE type s asynchronous or synchronous terminal or PC If you do not have a service contract and your unit is no longer under warranty You can purchase a service contract or arrange for Time and Material services by calling 949 455 4000 Sales Related Issues Call your local Telenetics sales office or authorized distributor For a listing of our Sales Offices visit our Web site at http www telenetics com Comments about the Manual To help us improve our product documentation please complete and return by mail or fax to 949 455 4010 the prepaid comment card on the next page If you prefer simply include your name company and telephone number and a member of the documentation group will contact you to discuss any comments you might have XX Contents Chapter 1 About the Modem Introduction Safety and Operational NOUCES eerie terti tore td dure eode to uiae Opera
96. If your communications software package supports a 3260 Modem or a comparable 3260 selection refer to Chapter 4 the Communications Software Package Operating Notes section Chapter 4 the Configuration Option Sets section Appendix A to change configuration options The Reference Card shows the complete menu structure If your package does not support all of the modem s configuration options or requires you to issue AT commands to the modem directly refer to Chapter 5 to learn AT command syntax Chapter 6 to resolve problems that you have isolated to the modem Communications software documentation If your package supports a Hayes Compatible selection refer to Chapter 4 the Communications Software Package Operating Notes section Chapter 5 to learn AT command syntax e For AT configuration settings refer to Chapter 4 the Configuration Option Sets section Appendix A to change configuration options The Reference Card shows the complete menu structure Chapter 6 to resolve problems that you have isolated to the modem Getting Started 3 9 paues Dumegp Getting Started Other Call Establishment Methods 3 10 Getting Started In addition to the configuration and operation methods in this chapter the modem supports other methods to establish and manage telephone connections V 25bis ACU for synchronous or asynchronous applications NetView LPDA 2 ACU for synchr
97. Modos egene e ARI REA Pri NOI REP o OD pra PAM R paie 2 15 Chapter 3 Getting Started reiege eer E 3 2 System Requirements for Software Upgrades AA 3 2 Centisunne and Operating the Meet iicet exer ERA R prote tate b pne A B tan b nce 3 2 Usine the Front TER seinne a T t 3 2 Navigating the Contisuration Men Tree 1a ces reote acies 3 5 Setting Configuration Options from the Front Panel 3 5 Contents continued vi Using the Modem with a Network Management System NMS 3 7 Using the AT Automatic Calling Unit ACU eene 3 8 Oiber Call Establishment NIetiode seanna 3 10 V 25bis ACU for Sync or Async Applications eee 3 10 NetView LPDA 2 ACU for Sync Applications sese 3 10 Syne Dialing from an IBM AS 400 iiiaieei ierit ee erre totes e 3 11 External Auto all Ee oi meeega eeh Ead nied pus dris Usa 3 11 Chapter 4 Configuring the Modem Bio UE E PT 4 2 Communications Software Package Operating Notes sse 4 2 Configuring the Modem for Use with Communications por MT 4 2 Operans INOUE TT ETE 4 3 If the Communications Software and Modem Do Not Operate 4 5 Prepare tor ODDS BD oe esee teat eun erp aes Ela OY Ende bot edat rg 4 5 Reinitializing Memory from the Front Panel n se 4 5 Reinitializing Memory Using the AT amp F Command 4 5 Configuration Opti n Sete e 4 6 bij s c E 4 6 Conf
98. Moduhr Nest 9 Pin Pair Function U S A and Canada Other UI Countries Left TIP and RING No jumper connector Connected with jumper Right Make Busy and Make Connected with jumper No jumper connector not Busy 1 applicable Inner backplane surface as viewed from the rear of the Modular Nest Table C 21 Backplane Pin Settings for Busy Out Modular Nest 21 Pin Pair Function U S A and Canada Other UI Countries Left Make Busy and Connected with jumper No jumper connector not Make Busy 1 applicable Right TIP and RING No jumper connector Connected with jumper Inner backplane surface as viewed from the rear of the Modular Nest C 44 Country Specific Information Warning Only qualified service personnel should remove pin jumpers A qualified service person is one who is familiar with product operation trained in the technology of electrically powered information processing and business equipment and adequately aware of the hazards associated with this equipment Removal by unqualified personnel could result in personal injury or equipment damage which could jeopardize your warranty and maintenance agreement Users who are not qualified to perform this action themselves should contact Telenetics or an authorized distributor regarding available upgrade services 4 Avertissement Seul un personnel qualifi est autoris enlever les cavaliers Nous appelons qualifi e toute personne famili re avec
99. Open Enclosure Card has eight LEDs 109 108 RC NC RI OH 326x Ready b RETURN DOWN ACROSS ENTER Figure 3 3 3260 Modem Enclosure Card Front Panel LEDs show the status of key DTE interface signals If a communication problem occurs LEDs can help you determine the cause Refer to Chapter 6 for a quick reference to problems and how to correct them Table 3 1 describes LED functions Table 3 1 326X LEDs LED Name Description TD Transmit Data Flashes when the modem accepts data from the local DTE to transmit RD Receive Data Flashes when the modem passes received data to the local DTE RI OH Ring Indicator On when an incoming call is ringing and when the modem is Off Hook off hook and connected to the dial line Getting Started 3 3 paues Dunes Getting Started 3 4 Getting Started Table 3 1 326X LEDs LED Name Description CD Data Carrier On when the local modem receives a carrier signal as defined Detect by the current modulation mode from the remote modem or when the DCD parameter High TR Data Terminal On when a DTR signal from a terminal is detected Ready RC NC Remote Control Flashes to indicate that the modem is under remote Network Control configuration via front panel or AT ACU On when the modem is under NMS control A B AorB Enclosure cards only On when modem A front panel information is dis
100. R transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTE is low the modem does not auto answer When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line and the DTE asserts DTR the modem responds to all AT commands The DTR signal must remain asserted throughout the connection When the DTE de asserts DTR The modem disconnects from the telephone line If DTR is de asserted the modem activates Busyout status The modem does not respond to dialing and answering commands but responds to all other commands AT amp F Reinit Memory Reinitialize Memory Resets the modem to factory default settings The four factory default option sets are restored to their original settings and all stored telephone numbers are deleted Enter AT amp F lt CR gt The modem displays 326x Initial and the terminal displays OK The factory programmed option sets are now in place AT amp GO AT amp GI AT amp G2 Guard Tone Off 550 1800 Guard Tone This command determines what type of guard tone the modem uses inV 22bis operation The proper guard tone AT amp G option setting is required by your PTT The modem does not use a guard tone The modem uses a guard tone of 550 Hz The modem uses a guard tone of 1800 Hz AT amp IO AT amp II AT amp I2 Modem ID 1 Modem ID 1 Modem ID 1 Display Modem ID Software part number Factory product code Country code Gray shading indicates country specific o
101. Register determines the decimal value of the escape code character The default setting 43 translates to the ASCII character Values greater than 127 disable the escape function S Register 3 Carriage Return Character Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Setting Range No No 13 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the carriage return character The default setting 13 translates to the ASCII CR carriage return character S Register 4 Line Feed Character Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Setting Range No No 10 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the line feed character The default setting 10 translates to the ASCII lt LF gt line feed character Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 11 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU S Register 5 Backspace Character Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Setting 8 Range 0 to 127 This S Register determines the decimal value of the backspace character The default setting 08 translates to the ASCII BS backspace character Values greater than 32 except 127 disable the backspace function S Register 6 Wait for Dial Tone Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 2 Range to 255 seconds If Call Progress is set to 0 1 or 3 ATXO ATX1 ATX3 and blind dial is selected the modem
102. S 5 9 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Guide nett entere t 6 2 iibi i DM 6 2 326 Senes Modem Diagnostic Tests iss cere reme etim rette 6 10 Synchronous Data Compression SDC Testing esses 6 11 Appendix A Configuration Quick Reference Configuration Quick Reference Menu Trees eene A 2 Por Mois Detil E A 2 Audience and Assumptio oneri territorio raini pcena k nebst d deed sna g es A 2 Periorming Namene EEN A 37 S Register AT Command Cross Reference eene A 38 Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements ssssesss A 39 Dig me eege bedengt deed E A 41 Configuring the Modem s Dual In line Package DIP Switches A 44 Appendix B Cabling and Interface Pinouts aperture B 2 EIA TIA 232 D Modem to Computer Interface sess B 2 ITU Recommendation V 35 Modem to Computer Interface B 4 ITU Rate V 35 Modem to Computer Interface Pinouts B 5 Differences EIA TIA 232 D and ITU Rate V 35 Interfaces B 6 DIAL LINE LEASE PRIVATE LINE PHONE Connector Pinouts B 6 NC Network Control Port Pinouts esses enne B 7 rir qe B 7 eir EE Mi METER B 7 DTE Cable Disgn stIes 1525 orit scire herein to rupe neue S a pnus c tege B 10 Appendix C Country Specific Informa
103. Se d Q 5 amp Personal Computer with Communications Asynchronous or Synchronous Software Package Terminal DTE In addition to the items supplied with the modem you may need the following PS eos B Choosing a Site Communications Software Package Many modem applications are controlled by communications software that supports serial communications When connecting a modem to a terminal communications software is unnecessary Refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 for more information Serial Cable A shielded straight through modem to terminal cable data communications equipment DCE to data terminal equipment DTE cable is required The cable must have a 25 pin D male connector and a DTE connector For modem to modem or other DCE DCE connection use a crossover cable The cable must support the modem signaling your application requires Select a cable based on your computer and the DTE pin assignments in Appendix B Where you place the modem can affect its operation To enhance performance PS d C 2 4 Installing the Modem nstall the modem in a clean well lighted area that is free from temperature extremes and dust Do not place anything on top of a modem Locate the modem no more than the EIA recommended distance from a DTE and within 6 feet 1 83m of a grounded AC power outlet Do not place anything within 1 inch 2 54 cm of either side of a modem Also to prevent over
104. System Developers For detailed information on configuration options equivalentAT Commands V 25 bis Automatic Calling Unit NetView s LPDA 2 dialing commands or diagnostic tests order the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Part No TEL 09925 by con tacting your Telenetics sales representative or local distributor How to Use the Documentation Set xii Following is a description of the 326X Series Modem documentation set 326X V 34 Series Modem Reference Card TEL T0009 01 For a quick reference to AT AT amp and AT commands dial modifiers and disconnect codes see the 326X V 34 Series Modem Reference Card The card also includes a menu tree of front panel options andAT command settings Using the Documentation Set continued 326X V 34 Series Modem User s Guide TEL T0009 This User s Guide provides the information needed to install configure and operate the modem Chapter outlines are as follows Chapter 1 About the Modem introduces the modem s features Chapter 2 Installing the Modem explains how to install and cable a modem Quick reference figures showing the connections to make are included Chapter 3 Getting Started discusses how the modem can be used and recommends how to configure and operate it The chapter includes a reference guide to the rest of the documentation set for further information Chapter 4 Configuring the Modem explains how to effectively configure the modem The four pr
105. T SDC ads 56 kbps LEENA Router Network Management Channel Figure 4 4 Bandwidth On Demand Option Set 3 4 26 Configuring the Modem SDC Option Set 4 Sync Leased Line with Dial Restoral N oACU Models 3261 63 66 68 Point to Point Leased Line Application with Dial Restoral Figure 4 5 shows a typical point to point leased line application with SDC modems providing leased line and dial back up for a bridge router network A Telenetics Network Management System NMS is shown This application could apply to any nodal equipment connections e g bridges routers or X 25 PADs With the modem s integral restoral capabilities if leased circuit operation is disrupted the modems restore the connection over a single dial line through the PSTN The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 Auto modulation mode This ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates If restoral criteria are met the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the PSTN At that time the modem attempts to run at its maximum rate over the dial line and falls back to lower speeds if required After an hour the modem returns to the leased line Select SDC Option Set 4 for this application Note the following The line configuration default of Option Set 4 is Two Wire Leased Line e With Option Set 4 the modem provides the netw
106. T D TEST OPTS Down MODULATION OPT S or at a parameter within a category scrolls through the options Selects an option and or initiates an action This key also serves as a Talk Data Enter softkey allowing you to toggle between using a telephone and the modem to establish a telephone connection NOTES 1 If you hold the wr or gt key down it repeats until you stop pressing 2 With the 3262 3267 Modems to toggle between modem A and modem B front panels hold y while pressing 9 Example Accessing a Configuration Option LA To select a predefined configuration option set Select Options 3 6 Getting Started 1 From the Data 9600 T D display press p until Select Options 1 displays 2 Press wr to display Select Options 2 Select Options 3 or Select Options 4 3 Press to select an option The modem is now configured for the option Status Displays The Data 9600 T D category is the default display when the modem is powered up or after the modem has timed out Ge the front panel control keys have not been used for at least five minutes The data rate 9600 in the display Data 9600 T D is the current DCE modem to modem data rate It varies with the speed at which the modems connect The Data 9600 T D category serves three primary functions Talk Data Switch Operating Status Displays Option Sets Dialing Options Talk Data Switch Pressing en when Data 9600 T D is displayed toggles th
107. TE does not provide DTR the modem will not automatically answer an incoming call Set DTR High AT amp D TERMINAL OPTS category Option Set 3 Sync Calls to Central Site V 25bis ACU Changing Default Configuration Settings Depending on application requirements you may need to change the following In Option Set 3 the default setting for network timing is Clock Internal AT amp X MODULATION OPTS It may be necessary to change the timing to external or loopback depending on the network clocking source In Option Set 3 the default setting for ACU Select None If you want an ACU to operate the modem select an ACU and a data format Customize the DTE port by selecting this option Set the modem s DTE rate to match the synchronous DTE s rate using the DTE Rate option AT KXDE TERMINAL OPTS Refer to Appendix A for parameter and option descriptions e If you plan on using DTR transitions DTR Dialing to signal the modem to make a call rather than issuing commands from an ACU do the following 1 Set Default Dial 1 AT KDA ACU OPTS category 2 Store a number in memory location 1 using Enter Phone AT amp Z ATAT 9600 T D category 3 Set DTR 108 1 AT amp D TERMINAL OPTS category When DTR is raised the modem will dial the specified call 4 18 Configuring the Modem Synchronous Dialing from an IBM AS 400 The modem operates as a synchronous originate modem with the IBM AS 400 Set the mod
108. TS Delay option applies if Mode Direct AT ZS CT RTS CTS follows RTS Use this setting if your application requires that CTS immediately follow RTS If one of these flow control methods is used Flow RTS CTS or Flow DTR CTS then CTS does not follow RTS in a flow off condition When CTS RTS the RTS CTS Delay ATK DL option is not available Default Dial Default Dialing AT DAO Off The default dial feature is disabled AT DAI 9 1 9 The modem direct dials the telephone number stored in the memory address selected memory addresses 1 9 when one of the following conditions occurs DTR 108 1 orTail and the DTE turns the DTR signal from off to on DTR 108 2 Esc Discon Reset or High the DTR signal is on and either the front panel Talk Data key at the Home position is pressed or control of the dial is switched to the modem with an exclusion key telephone ACU Select AT AT Form DTR Dial and the DTR signal transitions from off to on This option also determines the telephone number dialed during restoral Delay Buffer Delay ATK DBO Off The Off setting disables the Delay option AT KDB1 Buf or S38 This setting starts the buffer delay timer immediately upon detection of the disconnect request When the timer is operating the modem continues to process either the transmit or receive buffers The modem disconnects when the buffers are empty or the timer expires whichever occurs first NOTE When the modem is set for Direct mode no
109. Telenetics je ey aj 5 EEEEEHI S 326X V 34 V 34 SDC and V 32bis Series Modem User s Guide Notice 2001 Telenetics Corporation 25111 Arctic Ocean Lake Forest California 92630 949 455 4000 All rights reserved Printed in U S A Restricted Rights Notification for U S Government Users The software including firmware addressed in this manual is provided to the U S Government under agreement which grants the government the minimum restricted rights in the software as defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulation FAR or the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement DFARS whichever is applicable If the software is procured for use by the Department of Defense the following legend applies Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 11 of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 If the software is procured for use by any U S Government entity other than the Department of Defense the following notice applies Notice Notwithstanding any other lease or license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set for
110. The modem negotiates the highest common connection in the V 34 modulation mode This option does not display on the 3264V 32bis Series Modem Min Rate Minimum Rate Sets the minimum communication rate Options vary with the modulation mode AT ZE MNO 300 AT EMNI 1200 AT ZE MN 2400 ATK MN 4800 AT KMN4 7200 Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 23 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT EMN5 9600 ATK MN6 12 0 AT KMN7 14 4 AT gt K MN8 16 8 V 34 modems only AT ZS MN9 19 2 V 34 modems only AT gt K MN10 21 6 V 34 modems only AT gt KMNI11 24 0 V 34 modems only AT gt K MN12 26 4 V 34 modems only AT ZE MN13 28 8 V 34 modems only AT gt KMN14 31 2 V 34 modems only AT gt K MNI5 33 6 V 34 modems only DSR DSR Control Determines how the modem sets the DSR signal AT ZE MRO Normal DSR is controlled by the modem ATK MRI DSR High DSR is always on ATK MR2 DTR DSR follows DTR ATK MR3 Drop on Disc The same as the normal setting except that when a disconnection is initiated from the local end DSR is dropped immediately AT ZE MBA Sim LL The same as the DTR setting except DSR is dropped when the remote modem requests a disconnect AT Msg AT Messa
111. Used Not Used Not Used 4 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3261 3266 4 wire leased line connections are made via the LEASE LINE interface on the modem s rear panel Table C 6 describes 4 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 6 4 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3261 3266 Leased Line Connector Canada Germany Hong Kong All Other Pin U S A Austria United Kingdom Japan Countries 1 TX Ring TX Tip TX Tip TX Ring TX Ring 2 TX Tip TX Ring RX Tip TX Tip TX Tip 3 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used RX Tip 4 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used TX Ring 5 Not Used RX Tip RX Ring Not Used TX Tip 6 Not Used RX Ring TX Ring Not Used RX Ring 7 RX Tip Not Used RX Tip RX Tip 8 RX Ring Not Used RX Ring RX Ring C 20 Country Specific Information Phone Connector Interface Models 3261 3266 Connection to an external telephone can be made using the PHONE connector on the modems rear panel Table C 7 describes PHONE connector interface pinouts Table C 7 Phone Line Interface Models 3261 326 Phone Line Connector Pin Canada U S A Japan 1 Not Connected Not Used 2 Not Connected Not Used 3 MI Not Used 4 Ring Telset Ring 5 Tip Telset Tip 6 MIC Not Used 7 Not Connected Not Used 8 Not Connected Not Used Card Models 3262 67 3263 68 Backplane Interface Pinouts Dial Line Interface All Card Models Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE A and DIAL LINE B interfaces Table C 8
112. a dial restoral connection is established ATK DI2 High Fast For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded V 32bis modulation modes 5 retrains must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established For all other modulation modes 10 retrains must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established AT DIB High Slow For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded V 32bis modulation modes 10 retrains must occur within 10 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established For all other modulation modes 20 retrains must occur within 1 minute before a dial restoral connection is established RTS CTS Delay RTS CTS Delay Sets the minimum interval for the delay time between RTS and CTS These settings apply only when operating in the asynchronous Direct or synchronous data modes ATK DLO RTS CTS There is no RTS CTS delay Delay 0 AT DL1 15 15 ms delay before the modem sends CTS to the DTE after receiving RTS from the DTE Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 18 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT DL2 60 60 ms delay before the modem sends CTS to the DTE after receiving RTS from the DTE AT KDL3 90 90 ms delay before the modem sends CTS to the DTE after receiving RTS from the DTE AT DL4 S26 RTS CTS delay is determined by the
113. a given rate For example to operate the modem at 64 0 kbps the maximum capacitance is 900 pF 4 Divide the maximum cable capacitance by the length of the cable This results in the total cable capacitance per foot The formula below illustrates how to calculate the per foot capacitance Maximum Cable Capacitance pF _ Maximum Cable Capacitance pF Total Cable Length in Feet per Foot B 8 Cabling and Interface Pinouts For example assume you require a 30 foot cable You intend to operate your modem at 64 0 kbps After looking at Table B 4 you determine that the maximum capacitance for the cable is 900 pF According to the formula above divide 900 pF by 30 feet The result is 30 pF per foot 900 pF 30pF ft 30 ft Telenetics recommends you use Telenetics cables to attach your 326X modem s to DTE s Use Table B 5 to select cable s for your application To use non Telenetics cables Table B 6 provides examples of vendor cable wire length versus DTE rates for 326X stand alone units NOTE The part numbers specified in Table B 6 are not for complete cables but for the wires that are available with the correct capacitance to support the higher rates of the 326X Modem Table B 5 Telenetics DB 25 Low Capacitance Cables for 326X Telenetics Product Up to 19 2 Upto64 0 Upto96 0 Upto 115 2 Description Code kbps ft kpbs ft kbps ft kbps ft Telenetics 92153 50 30 10 6 Male 25 Male 25 92152 Straigh
114. able carrier signal is received by the modem over the telephone line Data Communications Equipment A modem or other data transmission device In data communications retrieval of an original digital data signal from a modulated analog signal The binary 0 off and 1 on output of a data terminal Modems convert digital signals into analog waves for transmission over conventional telephone lines Data Set Ready This signal is passed from the local modem Indicates that the local modem is ready to enter the data transmission phase Data Terminal Equipment End user devices that generate or receive data and that provide data communications control functions Examples include central processing units CPUs front end processors FEPs high speed multiplexers PCs user terminals and so on DTMF EBCDIC Echo EIA EIA TIA 232 D EOT ETX Exclusion key telephone Fallback Fall forward Flow control Four wire Full duplex Frame Gain Half duplex HDLC Hexadecimal ITU See CCITT ITU T ITU V 13 ITU V 22 bis Dual Tone Multi Frequency A signaling method used for push button telephones that combines two output signals to create a unique tone for each of the 12 keys Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code A method of coding digital signals using eight bits to generate 256 different characters Reflection back to the sender of a transmitted signal as heard on telephone circuits involving
115. abled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds Enable terminal flow control when operating in the Auto Reliable mode AT SRO AT KSRI RemRTS DCD Codex V 13 RTS DCD Remote Signaling This command allows for two types of PN signaling It is valid when RTS or DCD Remote The Codex setting lets you configure the modem for Telenetics or Motorola proprietary signaling This setting allows ITU V 13 compliant signaling for synchronous applications only AT STO ATKST1 Long form status Short form status Refer to AT amp V for a description of theAT gt ST command AT TDO TpDlyMin Off Throughput Minimization Delay Lets you improve modem performance in SDC mode by minimizing delays during data transmission This feature when enabled lets the remote modem only begin transmitting synchronous data to its DTE before an entire frame of data has been received from the local modem This option applies only when the modem is operating in SDC mode Throughput Delay Minimization is disabled With this setting the remote modem waits until it has received an entire frame of data before beginning to transmit the data to its DTE Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 30 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp
116. ables the initiation of restoral AT K REI Restore FP Only Manual initiation lets you initiate and terminate restoral by pressing the Talk Data key k y in the Home position on the modem s front panel AT XRE2 FP 108 1 The modem lets the DTE initiate restoral using DTR In DTR restoral an off to on DTR transition from the DTE interface initiates restoral This option is provided for DTEs that cannot manipulate Circuit 116 for restoral purposes AT RE3 FP 116 The modem allows the DTE to initiate restoral with Circuit 116 Circuit 116 lets you use off to on transitions of this signal from the DTE to initiate restoral according to ITU V 24 specifications ATK RE4 FP Auto In automatic restoral the originating modem on the leased line determines when restoral takes place The answer modem cannot automatically initiate restoral it can only answer an inbound call thus ensuring that both modems do not try to call each other at the same time Such an occurrence would result in a failed restoral attempt Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 27 e2ueJoJog oinp uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATK RES FP 108 ACU With this option off to on transitions of this signal from the DTE activate the
117. above unless stated otherwise IMPORTANT When you select a modulation mode you must ensure that the Max Rate AT MX and Min Rate AT MN parameter options are within the valid range for the mode The modem provides reliable data communication over 2 wire dial lines and 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines depending on the model Dial lines are public lines to which all telephone users have access leased lines also called private lines provide a dedicated connection over lines provided by the telephone company Whether you use dial or leased lines you can operate the modem as follows Using the front panel control keys and liquid crystal display LCD e Using industry standard AT and AT amp and Telenetics enhanced AT k AT commands from an attached terminal or commands from an asynchronous communications software package running on an attached PC From a network management system NMS Using call establishment methods such as V 25bis or LPDA2 automatic call units ACUs Figure 1 1 shows desktop or standalone modems The device is also available in high density nest cards which offer the same features and can be installed in Tele netics s Modular Nest 9 slot and Modular Nest 21 slot rack mounted enclosures 3260 EAST Figure 1 1 326X Series Modem Standalone Desktop Model Safety and Operational Notices Repair Warning Do not attempt to repair the mod
118. ack if the call is successful or not successful Where Do I Go from Here For more information on using the LPDA 2 ACU refer to Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for configuration information and for information on NetView s LPDA 2 dialing commands Sync Dialing from an IBM AS 400 The modem can be configured to operate as a synchronous originate modem with the IBM AS 400 The AS 400 supports switched operation with call origination via a V 25bis compliant call establishment driver In this type of application the modem is driven by the APPC APPN bit synchronous protocol Where Do I Go from Here For more information on using the modem with an IBM AS 400 refer to Chapter 4 for configuration instructions Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details on bit synchronous protocol frame formats and the V 25bis protocol External Auto Call Units The modem can be used with applications that support external dialers such as the Bell 801C Once an external dialer establishes a call it passes control of the dial line to the modem by the MI MIC control leads on the DIAL LINE connector NOTE This type of application is supported in Canada and the U S A only Where Do I Go from Here For more information on external call units refer to Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Gett
119. agement System NMS Modem functions can be configured and controlled from an NMS Refer to The network management system documentation Appendix A for brief descriptions of parameter options and features The 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for detailed descriptions of parameter options and features Getting Started 3 7 paues Bunje5 Getting Started 3 8 Getting Started Using the AT Automatic Calling Unit ACU To connect the modem to an asynchronous terminal a terminal without software or a PC running an asynchronous communications software package you use the modem sAT Automatic Calling Unit ACU interface The AT ACU is compatible with The industry standard AT command set AT and AT amp commands The Telenetics enhanced AT command set AT k commands AT commands define how the modem is configured how it makes calls and what test operations it performs The AT command set lets you configure and operate modem options and features from the PC or asynchronous terminal keyboard Using the Modem with an Async Terminal If you are connecting the modem to an asynchronous terminal you can use the AT ACU to configure parameter options from the keyboard Learn the AT command syn tax in order to generate the appropriateAT commands Where Do I Go from Here To continue configuring the modem from an asynchronous terminal refer to Chapter 4 for configuration instructions Chapter 5 to learn
120. all Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions nine subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of ten calls the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 30 minutes After 30 minutes the number is available for dialing Country Specific Information C 27 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Spain Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions three subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing Other Country Specific Information This section contains information that applies to the following countries Canada
121. ammable data mode jack arrangement supports Make Busy operation Using this jack type you can make the modem appear to be off hook to the central telephone office Note In modems in the U S A and Canada the Make Busy function operates only in nest card modems Make Busy settings display in standalone modems but are not active Line Line Type AT amp LO Dial The modem communicates over dial lines in dial applications only AT amp LI 2W Lease The modem communicates over a 2 wire leased line The ACUSs AT and V 25bis are not functional when the modem is connected to a leased line AT amp L2 4W Lease The modem communicates over a 4 wire leased line The ACUs AT and V 25bis are not functional when the modem is connected to a leased line AT Form AT Data Format Determines the format of the data when ACU Select is set toAT AT amp MO Async The modem communicates asynchronously in command and data mode AT amp MI Sync Data The modem communicates asynchronously when in command mode disconnected from the dial line and synchronously when in data mode AT amp M2 DTR Dial When an off to on DTR transition is detected the modem dials the number stored in the memory location designated by the Default Dial option Once connected the modems transmit data synchronously If DTR transitions from on to off the modem hangs up and returns to the asynchronous command mode AT amp M3 Man Dial DTR signals toggle between talk and data mode With DTR
122. an ACU to operate the modem select an ACU and a data format f you do not use theAT ACU to send commands to operate the modem customize the DTE port as follows Set the modem s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE s rate using DTE Rate AT XDE TERMINAL OPTS category Set the modem s parity to match the parity set in the asynchronous DTE using Parity AT K RP ACU OPTS category Set the modem s character length using Char Length ACU OPTS category to match the character length in the asynchronous DTE Refer to Appendix A for parameter and setting descriptions n Option Set 4 the modem is set for XON XOFF software flow control If your application requires hardware flow control change the Flow option AT KFL TERMINAL OPTS category f the DTE does not provide DTR the modem will not automatically answer an incoming call Set DTR High AT amp D TERMINAL OPTS category Configuring the Modem 4 19 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Option Set 4 Synchronous Leased Line Applications with Dial Restoral Models 3261 63 66 68 Changing Default Configuration Settings Depending on application requirements you may change the following options The default Restoral setting in Option Set 4 leased line models is Auto FP When first configuring the modem set Restoral Off This prevents erroneous status errors from displaying while you configure leased line options After configuration
123. an also select the dial line jack type using the AT amp J command Refer to Appendix A for details Country Specific Information C 42 Country Specific Information Using the Modular Nest Backplane s Busy Out Feature This section applies to the following countries which use the Universal International UI Modular Nest enclosure backplane Australia Belgium Canada Denmark Finland e Ireland Israel Norway Sweden Switzerland U S A This section also is of interest to users in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom Make Busy versions of Modular Nest 9 and Modular Nest 21 backplanes which install in a Modular Nest enclosure with card modems come equipped with the Busy Out feature This feature causes a Busy Out modem to appear busy to the central office when Power is disconnected from the Modular Nest enclosure The modem card is not present in its slot Busy Out ON the option is set through the front panel menu the AT ACU or a network manager Busy Out is intended for use with Model 3262 and 3267 dial modems In some countries it is also used in dial restoral mode on Model 3263 and 3268 leased modems Country Specific Information C 43 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Make Busy backplanes are factory configured for Busy Out operation in their country destination as indicated in Table C 20 orTabl eC 21 Table C 20 Backplane Pin Settings for Busy Out
124. anel views C 12 redial attempts C 23 Redialing last number 5 9 Re executing AT command A 5 7 regulations 1 9 2 2 Reinitializing the modem 4 5 Reliable connection AT messages 5 5 Reliable mode 5 13 Remote Access Reset 4 28 remote configuratio n5 8 A 45 REN C 33 C 36 restoral 4 9 4 16 4 20 4 22 C 16 restricted commands C 12 restricted features C 5 Result codes AT word form A 41 Return character S Register 3 5 11 RFI and ferrite cylinder 2 7 Ring count S Register 1 5 11 Ring count to answer on S Register 0 5 10 RING message A 41 Rockwell based modems 5 18 Index 4 router 4 16 RTS CTS delay S Register 26 5 15 S SDC configuring 4 22 operational requirements 4 21 pre operation note s4 21 SDC tests 6 11 Security features 1 8 self test 2 15 Serial cable equipment needed 2 4 Site selection 2 4 Software information displaying using the ATI command 5 8 South Africa C 10 Spain C 10 Specifications interfaces ITU V 35 modem to computer B 5 NC port B 7 PHONE B 7 S Register 04 Line Feed Character 5 11 S Registers 00 ring count to answer on 5 7 5 10 01 ring 5 11 02 Escape code character 5 11 03 Carriage Return Character 5 11 05 backspace character 5 12 06 Wait for Dial Tone 5 12 07 Wait for data carrier 5 12 08 Pause delay dial modifiers 5 13 10 Carrier loss hang up delay 5 13 11 DTMF tone duration 5 14 12 Escape code guard time 5 14 12 escape sequence guard time 5 6 18 Test
125. applications the local modem and DTE use DTR CTS signals to operate flow control In SDC applications DTR CTS flow control operates the same as asynchronous applications except flow control is unidirectional from the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal the modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full The DTR signal has no impact on flow control in synchronous applications In asynchronous applications the local modem and DTE use RTS CTS signals to operate flow control The terminal uses RTS to signal when its buffers are full The modem uses CTS to signal when its buffers are full An on to off transition signals the transmitting device to stop sending data an off to on transition signals that data can flow In SDC applications RTS CTS flow control functions the same as asynchronous applications except flow control is unidirectional from the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal the modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full The RTS signal has no impact on flow control in synchronous applications XON XOFF Pass Through Flow Control The local modem and DTE operate flow control by passing characters embedded in the data stream between them Check your DTE manual to verify if the DTE recognizes XON XOFF flow control NOTES 1 Pass through flow control must be used with caution when Mode Normal and Modem Flow On because XON XOFF characters are acted on by the remote modem at its DCE port 2 Pass through fl
126. aptive Rate On On On On On Mode Originate Answer Originate Answer Answer Clock Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Retrain High BER High BER High BER High BER High BER Longspace Off Off Off Off Off PSTN On On On On On Guard Tone Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific V32bis Series default shown first V 34 Series default shown second Configuring the Modem 4 11 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Table 4 3 Option Set Defaults 326X V 32bis and 326X V 34 Modems Continued Option Set 4 Option Set 4 3260 62 65 67 3261 63 66 68 Off Low Fast Manual Off LL Fail Auto Rel Regular V 42 Enabled Destruct On Off Default None Async Bitsync Async Off Country specific On 10 ASCII Char V25bis V 25bis Before CD Enable Verbose DTE Rate Off FF 326X Enable 4 FP Auto Low Fast 1Hr Off LL Fail Direct Regular V 42 Enabled Destruct On Off Default None Async Bitsync Sync 1 Country specific On 10 ASCII Char V25bis V 25bis Before CD Enable Verbose DTE Rate Off FF 326X Enable 4 Parameter Option Set 1 Option Set2 Option Set 3 RESTORAL OPT S modems without the restoral function display only the HOLD DIALINE option Restore Off Off Off LtoD Low Fast Low Fast Low Fast DtoL Manual Manual Manual Hold Dialine Off Off Off Ans Rest LL Fail LL Fail LL Fail EC DC OPT S Mode Auto Rel Direct
127. ata format 3 2 Data rates 1 6 default defined 3 5 Defaults front panel option sets 3 5 option sets 4 11 Delay before looking for DTR S Register 25 5 15 delayed forbidden lists C 23 Denmark C 7 Diagnostic tests 6 10 Dial line jack types United States of America C 38 Dial modifiers A 39 dial wait modifier 5 12 Dialing from keyboard 5 7 dialing and storing numbers 5 2 dialing intoa LAN 4 16 digital interface B 2 DIP switches 2 5 Direct mode 5 13 Disconnect buffer delay S Register 38 5 16 displaying S register value 5 9 DOC requirements C 28 DTE connectors 2 5 DTE inactivity disconnect S Register 30 5 15 DTE port 4 18 DTE rates 1 6 Index 2 DTMF tone duration S Register 11 5 14 DTR delay 5 15 E efficiency 4 21 EIA TIA 232 D interface 2 6 EIA TIA 232 D interface specification B 2 electrical interface 6 2 Electrical interfaces 2 6 enclosure card modems 2 14 enclosure cards 1 2 encoding 4 21 entering data on the front pane 1A 37 equipment damage 2 3 Error correction and data compression feature s1 8 ERROR message A 41 error messages 2 15 Error messages self test 2 15 Escape code character S Register 2 5 11 Escape code guard time S Register 12 5 14 escape mode 5 3 Escape sequence 5 5 Example Accessing a Configuration Option 3 6 Examples V 32bis and V 34 4 16 exiting command mode 5 8 external dialer 3 11 F FCC Registratio nC 36 FCC regulations C 37 ferrite cylinders 2 7 filters 2 7 Finla
128. ation Restricted front panel option settings do not appear in front panel menus PC software communication packages often send fixed initialization strings to the modem via AT commands These strings do not account for country specific modem restrictions To make software communication package installation easier the modem responds as follows If you enter a restricted AT AT x or AT amp command for an option that is completely restricted the modem displays OK instead of ERROR The modem does not however modify its configuration in this case IMPORTANT The command does not change the modem configuration An OK lets the software package continue communication with the modem Some software packages may be affected by this new functionality Telenetics recommends that you change the initialization string of your software communication package for the restricted options or option settings that may apply in your country Refer to the software package documentation for further information If you enter a restricted AT AT or AT amp command for an option that has some restricted settings the modem displays ERROR If you enter a restricted V 25 bis command the modem responds with the INValid message INV Standalone Modem Rear Panel Views This section shows rear panel views for models 3260 3261 3265 and 3266 Following each illustration is a list of the countries that use that modem version NOTE For Mo
129. ave such an option 3 Select a Hayes Compatible entry With this option Telenetics enhanced commands AT are not supported 4 Try operating the communications software If you have problems refer to the Operating Notes section next and to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Guide Operating Notes Keep the following in mind when using the modem with communications software General Notes The information in this section applies to all 326X Series Modem platforms Selecting an Option Set Option Set 1 was designed for use with asynchronous communications software packages It is compatible with most communications software Option Sets 2 3 and 4 are intended for different applications and have different default settings Select Option Set 1 when using a communications software package Establishing a Connection with Option Set 1 With Option Set 1 the modem operates as follows 1 The modem attempts to establish a LAPM connection 2 If the connection is unsuccessful the modem attempts to establish an MNP connection 3 If the previous connections are unsuccessful the modem attempts a Normal mode connection to the remote modem All data that is sent to the modem s attached computer terminal before the modem establishes a connection is lost Auto Dialing and Answering in Option Set 1 When the modem is configured for Option Set 1 and the communications software package executes an auto dialing and answering operation t
130. backplane connector 2 8 Installing the Modem Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a Power Cable Do the following for each power cable of a Modular Nest enclosure populated with 3267 and 3268V 34 Modems 1 Snugly wrap the cable once completely around the cylinder Figure 2 6 2 Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts 3 Ensure that 1 to 1 1 2 inches of the cable protrude from the cylinder on the end you insert into the backplane connector 4 Snap the cylinder closed You can reopen and close it to reset the cable 5 Insert the cable into the Modular Nest enclosure connector with the ferrite cylinder close to the connector To Power Jack Ferrite Cylinder 4 ye Ml _ Cable Looped Once Around Cylinder 1 1y To Modular Nest Enclosure Connector Figure 2 6 Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a Power Cable Installing the Modem 2 9 w poN y Duugsut Installing the Modem Important Information About the Modular Nest Enclosure Front Door Warning For safety the enclosure front door should remain closed and locked at all times unless you are installing removing or configuring product cards Avertissement Pour des raisons de s curit la porte d entr e doit tre toujours ferm e et verrouill e sauf lorsque vous installez retirez ou configurez des cartes Warnung Aus Sicherheitsgr nden darf die Klappe auf der Vorderseite nur zum Installieren Entfernen oder Konfiguri
131. bling important safety guidelines for connecting the modem in your country and Appendix C regulatory restrictions and requirements To order cables refer to Appendix B then contact your Telenetics sales 734 representative or local distributor for ordering information GE NOTE If you are installing a 326X Series Modem card refer to the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with your modem s backplane 2 2 Installing the Modem Unpacking the Modem The modem is wrapped in reusable shock absorbent packing material Save the carton and packing material for later reuse Telenetics supplies the items shown in Figure 2 1 with the modem WM V Ss e EE Es One or Two Modular Audio Cables SS 3260 3265 One Others Two One Power Cord One 326X Series Modem Standalone Unit Shown One User s Guide One Reference Card Figure 2 1 Unpacking the Modem If the equipment is damaged contact the shipper If you have further concerns about damage or missing parts contact your nearest Telenetics representative or In the U S A Outside the U S A Telenetics Customer Support The nearest Telenetics distributor can be found 25111 Arctic Ocean by accessing our Web site at Lake Forest CA 92630 http www telenetics com 949 455 4000 Installing the Modem 2 3 w poN y PBumeisu Installing the Modem Additional Equipment Required e a aT Modem to Terminal Cable
132. busy signal the modem hangs up and the screen displays NO ANSWER Must be the last character in the dial string before a carriage return The R modifier makes the modem originate the call in answer mode and is used to dial an originate only modem Immediately after the dial command is processed an answer back tone is generated and the modem attempts to complete the connection for the length of time specified by Call Time out Quiet Answer R Reverse Discon h nect Makes the modem disconnect from the dial line This must be the last modifier in the dial string and must also be preceded by a semicolon If this modifier is not preceded by a semicolon it is ignored by the modem The modifier can be entered through the front panel the AT ACU or network manager space Presen period tation dash characters paren theses These characters do not act as modifiers They are presentation characters that are ignored A 40 Configuration Quick Reference Result Codes Result codes are responses sent to the terminal by the AT ACU Result codes may be sent in word form RsltForm Verbose or ATV 1 numeric form RsltForm Numeric or ATVO or disabled RsltCode Disable or ATQ1 When numeric form is selected the modem issues only a number code The rate displayed in a CONNECT message depends on the Connect Message option ACU OPTS menu If Con Msg DTE Rate the DTE to modem rate is displayed If Con Msg
133. cable into the modem and then plug into an outlet IMPORTANT Transmit levels on a leased line are typically much greater than those on AC WE eeneg a dial line Do not connect a modem to the dial network when the modem is Outlet Power configured for leased line operation the telephone company may detect a fault Cord condition and initiate an incorrect service call Figure 2 7 3260 3265 Modem Cabling EIA TIA 232 D Interface Cable Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter Step 2 Install an EIA TIA 232 D cable between the modem s DTE connector and the DTE or PC s serial port Tighten the cable connector retaining screws Step 3 Unplug the telephone cord from the wall jack and plug it into the modem s PHONE LINE connector Dial Telephone Step 4 Attach the modular audio cable provided with the modem to the modem s DIAL tend S LINE connector Connect the cable to the RJ 11 dial line wall jack Su Telephone Step 5 Attach another modular audio cable provided with the modem to the modem s Line LEASE LINE connector Connect the cable to the leased line wall jack IMPORTANT Transmit levels on a leased line are typically much greater than those on a dial line Do not connect a modem to the dial network when the modem is config Po ured for leased line operation the telephone company may detect a fault condition Cord and initiate an incorrect service call AC Outl E be Step 6 Plug th
134. ces Available as an optional order item the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide is designed for users who require more detail on operating the modem s configuration options and diagnostic self tests Contact your Telenetics sales representative or local distributor for ordering information Trademarks Refer to the following documents for more information 326X 326XFAST and 326XFAST SDC Series Modem Product Specification Sheets EIA Application Note 562 Appendix A defines cable lengths in terms of DTE rates NetView operators should be familiar with NetView Operations Primer IBM Part No SC30 3363 NetView Operation Scenarios IBM Part No SC30 3376 xiv The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations AT is a command language used with the Smartmodem 1200 and the Smartmodem 2400 Hayes Microcomputer Products Inc CompuServ CompusServ Inc MNP Microcom Networking Protocol and Relay Gold Microcom Inc NetView and IBM International Business Machines Corporation Novell and NetWare Novell Inc Telenet Sprint International Communications Corporation Tymnet British Telecommunications UNIX Unix System Laboratories Using the Documentation Set continued Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual e User entries appear as follows AT x T lt CR gt System messages appear as follows NO CARRIER A carriage retu
135. chronous dumb terminal a terminal without software or to a PC running an asynchronous communications software package Each of these is described in the sections that follow If You Are Unsure of Your DTE s Data Format The DTE manual should tell you what data format asynchronous or synchronous it uses Most PC applications use an asynchronous data format Using the Front Panel You can configure and operate all modem functions using the front panel s Light emitting diodes LEDs Liquid crystal display LCD Configuration menus Control keys Figures 3 1 and 3 2 show the stand alone modem front panel Figure 3 3 shows the enclosure card front panel Note the LCD LEDs and control keys NOTE Information specific to enclosure card modems is covered in the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with the modem backplane 3 2 Getting Started IMPORTANT To use the front panel keys the modem must be connected to an AC power source the rear panel power switch must be turned on and rear panel DIP Switches 3 and 6 must be set to the Off up position See Chapter 2 for details Six front panel LEDs indicate status LCD Display E 326x Ready Control Keys ROH RETURN ENTER e E I fel Figure 3 2 Standalone 3260 Modem with Front Cover
136. cific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 7 99Ud19j94 49INH uolyeinBiyyuog Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATIn Display Software Information n 0 1 2 9 Ozdisplays 960 1 displays 000 2 displays OK 9 displays reason for last disconnect These messages are sent with OK when AT command processing is complete Volume Speaker Volume ATLO ATL1 Soft The speaker volume is set to soft ATL2 Medium The speaker volume is set to medium ATL3 Loud The speaker volume is set to loud Speaker Speaker Control ATMO Off The speaker is always off ATMI Dialing The speaker is on when dialing and training and off when the modem enters data mode ATM2 On The speaker is always on ATM3 Security The speaker is on when dialing is complete and off when the modem enters data mode Retrain ATOO The modem leaves command mode and returns online to data mode ATOI TEST Retrain The modem leaves command mode returns online and initiates a retrain with the remote modem Dial Dial Type ATP Pulse The modem uses pulse dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P modifiers RsltCode Result Codes ATQO Enable Result codes are displayed at the DTE ATQI Disable Result codes are not displayed at the DTE ATQ2 Orig Result codes are output t
137. ction the modem negotiates the highest common data rate with the remote modem set to its factory default setting or automode The modem also uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 V 32bis orV 32 modulation modes This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Option Set 2 Sync Answering Central Site Without an ACU Option Set 2 satisfies the needs of a synchronous application where most calls are to a central site see Table 4 1 Because calls are received primarily at the central site the modem is set to answer calls automatically With DTR 108 2 the local DTE can control the DTR signal This allows the local DTE to use DTR transitions to connect the modem to the central site at the beginning of transmission and disconnect it when transmission ends At the beginning of each connection the modem negotiates the highest common data rate with the remote modem The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V 34 V 32bis or V 32 modulation modes This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Option Set 3 Sync Calls to Central Site Using the V 25bis ACU Option Set 3 satisfies the needs of a synchronous application where the remote modems originate calls to a central site see Table 4 1 With Option Set 3 the modem originates calls with its V 25bis ACU The DTR option is set to 108 2 so that the V 25bis ACU can manipulate the DTR signal AII other options in the ACU OPT S category are set for a typical sy
138. ction box Connect the other end to the appropriate Digi Board on the rear of the NMS Proxy Agent PC a To Proxy Agent PC and then Figure 2 10 Connecting to a 9000 PC or 9000 UX NMS Installing the Modem 2 13 w poN eui PBumeisu Installing the Modem To connect multiple modems in a daisy chain configuration refer to Figure 2 11 Step 1 Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter Step 2 Attach an 8 pin DIN adapter cable connector to the modem s NC IN connector The 8 pin control channel connector at the other end of this cable is connected to a junction box as shown in Figure 2 8 Step 3 Connect an 8 pin DIN cable from the first NC OUT connector to the next NC IN connector and so on H Q EN To Junction Box and NMS 326X Series Modem Figure 2 11 Connecting Modems in a Daisy Chain Configuration To attach modem enclosure cards to an NMS refer to the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with the modem backplane Turning on the Modem The power cable connects the rear of the modem to a standard 115V outlet After making other connections plug the power cable into the modem and then plug it into an outlet Turn the rear panel power switch to the On up position When powered on the modem automatically performs a self test of internal circuits The Automatic Self Test section next describes this test and the front panel displays that can follow it
139. ction is made through the modem s DTE port see Figure B 1 NOTE The 326XFAST SDC Series Modem with a V 35 interface is currently available in the U S A and Canada Caution The 326X FAST SDC Series Modem if ordered with ITU s V 35 Recommendation supports connection to external equipment also operating with a V 35 electrical interface If your DTE does not have a V 35 interface do not under any circumstances connect the modem to a non V 35 device I fyou make such a connection you may seriously damage the modem Telenetics makes no guarantee of the equipment s integrity if you do not ensure that compatible interfaces are used If your DTE does not have a V 35 interface use an external converter cable DIAL LINE PHONE NC BIN n OO om Factory Preset 6 Position DIP to Off Up Figure B 1 326XFAST SDC Series Modem with ITU V 35 Interface NOTES 1 The modem is configured at the factory for an EIA TIA 232 D interface or ITU rate V 35 and is shipped according to what you specify Both interfaces are not available in the same unit 2 When operating with the V 35 interface switch S1 must be set to the off up position B 4 Cabling and Interface Pinouts ITU Rate V 35 Modem to Computer Interface Pinouts The modem s digital interface conforms to ITU Rate V 35 The modem should be connected to a data terminal with a compatible digital interface see Table B 1
140. d Data Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the remote RXD modem 4 CA 105 Request To Send Sent from local terminal to local modem to ready it for data RTS transmission 5 CB 106 Clear To Send Passes from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is CTS clear to transmit data Occurs in response to Request To Send 6 CC 107 Data Set Ready Indicates the local modem is ready to transmit and receive data DSR 7 AB 102 Signal Ground Common signal Provides a common ground reference point for interface circuitry 8 CF 109 Data Carrier Passed from the local modem to the local DTE when an acceptable Detect DCD carrier signal is received by the modem 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 1 Answer Signal passed from terminal to modem to select answer originate Originate Select status When signal is on answer signal is selected When signal is off originate signal is selected This signal works with Mode External B 2 Cabling and Interface Pinouts Table B 1 Modem Computer Interface Connections Continued EIA TIA Pin 232 D ITUV 24 Signal Definition 12 CI 112 Data Signal Rate CI 112 is passed from modem to terminal indicating signaling rate Indicator When signal is on modem operates at 2400 bps or greater When signal is off modem operates below 2400 bps 13 110 Signal Quality Signal passes from modem to terminal indicating signal quality of telephone line
141. d Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 MBI X Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 3 MI X X X Not Used Not Used 4 Ring X X X X X 5 Tip X X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used Not Used 7 PR X X Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 PC X X Not Used Not Used Not Used X active signal Table C 13 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types Table C 13 PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation Telco Jack Selection Phone Connector Phone Jack RJ45S RJ11C Pin No Function RJAMB CA45A RJ16C CA11A 1 N C N C N C N C N C 2 N C N C N C N C N C 3 MI X X X Not Used 4 Ring X X X X 5 Tip X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 N C N C N C N C N C 8 N C N C N C N C N C N C Not Connected X active signal C 30 Country Specific Information 3266 Modem Table C 14 describes dial line connector pinouts for RJ jack types Table C 14 DIAL Line Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation Dial Line Dial Line Telco Jack Selection Connector Pin Jack RJ45S RJ11C No Function RJ4MB CA45A RJ16C CA11A 1 MB X Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 MBI X Not Used Not Used Not Used 3 MI X X X Not Used 4 Ring X X X X 5 Tip X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 PR X X Not Used Not Used 8 PC X X Not Used Not Used X active signal Table C 15 describes the Phone connector pinouts for RJ jack types Table C 15 PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation Phone Phone Telco Jack Selection Connector Jack RJ45S RJ11C Pin No Function RJ4MB CA45
142. d the modem that uses the normal DTE DCE interface The ACU allows for direct modem control and configuration by the DTE In data communications a continuously varying signal such as the human voice which conventional telephone lines are designed to transmit For transmission on these lines the digital output from a computer or terminal must be converted to an analog signal American Standard Code for Information Interchange A method of coding digital signals using seven bits or eight bits with parity to generate 96 different characters Data without an accompanying time signal Timing is derived from the asynchronous data with character boundaries defined by start and stop bits Automatic answering A modem responds to an incoming call over a dial line and establishes contact with a remote modem The rate at which discrete signal elements are transmitted In asynchronous transmission baud rate bit rate In most synchronous transmissions the baud rate is an integer submultiple of the bit rate For example in V 22 bis QAM modulation four bits are sent in each baud If the baud rate is 600 V 22 bis transmits at 2400 600 x 4 bits per second bps A method of coding digital signals using five bits to generate 58 different characters See Baud Block check character A unique number derived from data transmitted in a block The character is appended to data blocks for use in determining whether a block is received with errors B
143. da Japan South Africa All Other Connector Pin U S A United Kingdom Countries 1 Ring Not Used Ring 2 Tip Not Used Tip 3 Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Not Used Tip Ring 5 Not Used Ring Tip 6 Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Connected Not Used 8 Not Used Not Connected Not Used C 22 Country Specific Information 4 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3263 3268 4 wire leased line connections are made via the 2W 4W LEASE interface Table C 11 describes 4 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 11 4 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3263 3268 Hong Kong Dial Line Canada Japan South Africa All Other Connector Pin U S A United Kingdom Countries 1 TX Ring Not Used TX Ring 2 TX Tip Not Used TX Tip 3 Not Used RX Tip RX Tip 4 Not Used TX Tip TX Ring 5 Not Used TX Ring TX Tip 6 Not Used RX Ring RX Ring 7 RX Tip Not Connected RX Tip 8 RX Ring Not Connected RX Ring Delayed and Forbidden Lists When operating in certain countries the modem processes call attempt failures as delayed and forbidden calls This section describes how delayed forbidden lists operate in each country that supports this feature Australia Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 10 numbers In eit
144. dels 3262 3263 3267 and 3268 the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with the modem backplane contains enclosure card and backplane information C 12 Country Specific Information 3260 Dial Only Modem 3260 Modem Rear Panel Dial Only Figure C 1 shows the rear panel of the 3260 dial only modem This version is used in e U S A Model 3260 Canada Model 3265 Japan Model 3265 DIAL LINE PHONE VH 1 ON 6 N OUT Figure C 1 Rear Panel Layout 3260 Dial Only 3261 Modem Rear View Leased Line Dial Restoral Figure C 2 shows the rear panel view of the 3261 leased line modem with dial restoral This version is used in U S A Model 3261 Canada Model 3266 Japan Model 3266 NOTE 326X Series Modems for Canada and Japan are identical to Model 3261 for the U S A The model number of the modem for Canada and Japan is 3266 Canada and Japan are included in this section with the view of the U S A 3261 modem PHONE LEASE LINE DIAL LINE MER 1 ON 6 N OUT Figure C 2 Rear Panel Layout 3261 Leased Line with Dial Restoral Country Specific Information C 13 uoneuuoju oyi2eds Anuno 3265 Dial Only Modem
145. dems but are not active AT KLTI Test The modem signals the DTE on V 24 Circuit 142 Pin 25 when a test is in progress PSTN Signaling PSTN Signaling Determines how the modem handles disconnect signaling when operating in theV 34 V 32bis or V 32 coded or uncoded modulation modes AT ZS MDO Off Your modem disconnects without signaling the remote modem Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 22 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT ZS MIDI On Your modem signals the remote modem to disconnect by sending a PSTN cleardown Modem Flow Modem Flow Control Lets the modem generate and respond to XON XOFF flow control signals received at the DIAL LINE or LEASED LINE port NOTE This option only applies to the Normal data transfer mode ATX MFO Off The modem flow control is not used ATK MF1 On The modem periodically sends XON signals to the remote modem when it can receive data When the modem cannot receive data it sends an XOFF signal to the remote modem Mod Modulation Mode Determines the modulation mode used by the modem in data transmission Changing modulation mode resets AT ZE MX Max Rate and AT MN Min Rate to their defaults for the modulation mode selected When you select a mode ensure that the Max Rate AT KMX Max Rate and
146. ds Enable terminal flow control and Modem Flow when operating in Normal mode Selecting Mode Normal results in a Direct synchronous connection in the SDC mode Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 29 o2ueJoJou oinp uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Command Parameter amp Option Description AT SM2 ATK SM AT SM4 Reliable Auto Reliable Spd AutoRel In an asynchronous application once the local modem connects with the remote modem it attempts to establish an error corrected link In Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled The local modem disconnects if it cannot establish an error corrected link Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode Ifthe modem negotiates a connection in theV 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode it terminates the call If operating with SDC enabled in both modems once the local modem connects with the remote modem it attempts to establish an error corrected link In SDC mode the Data Compression LAT ZS DC and Error Correction AT ZE EC options are ignored a connection is attempted usingV 42bis data compression and LAPM error correction The local modem establishes a synchronous Reliable connection or disconnects if it cannot establish an erro
147. ds are intended only for immediate modem action These commands allow you to perform a number of the important day to day modem functions such as Re execute your last command Answer an incoming call Dial a telephone number Hang up Exit command mode return to data mode Redial the last telephone number 5 6 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface This section addresses AT commande that do not cross reference to a front panel option A Re Execute Last Command Settings Not applicable Format Al This command re executes the last AT command string issued to the modem including redialing a telephone number To re execute the last command enter A but do not follow this command with CR The A command may be entered in either uppercase or lowercase characters However when entered in lowercase characters the modem cannot use the autobaud feature to determine parity The modem continues to use the parity determined by the previous command The AT ZD Dial Rstrct AT command limits the A command The modem does not support auto parity for this command ATA Manual Answer Settings Not applicable Format ATA CR This command instructs the modem to go off hook and send answer back tone over the line When the ATA command is used during an incoming call the modem initiates the answer end of the modulation mode handshake sequence DSR transitions from off to on when the answer back tone is sent
148. du mat riel lectronique Dans les zones susceptibles d tre frapp es par la foudre prenez des pr cautions pour viter que le mat riel lectronique soit endommag Contactez votre compagnie t l phonique ou un vendeur d accessoires lectroniques pour obtenir des renseignements concernant les syst mes de protection contre la foudre Certains usagers confront s des probl mes caus s par des sautes de tension dues la foudre ont limin ces probl mes en installant des r gulateurs de tension appropri s sur les c bles lectriques et les c bles de donn es reli s aux dispositifs Telenetics Warnung Telenetics Ger te sind grunds tzlich in f r Rechner und elektronische Anlagen vorgesehenen Umgebungen zu verwenden In unwettergefahrdeten Bereichen ist jegliche Elektronik gegen Blitzeinwirkung zu sch tzen N heres ber entsprechende Schutzeinrichtungen erfahren Sie von Ihrer Telefongesellschaft oder einem Elektroh ndler Probleme mit Spannungsst Den durch Blitzeinwirkung lassen sich durch Einbau von Uberspannungsableitern in die zu Telenetics Geriiten f hrenden Netz und Datenleitungen beheben Operating the Modem from the Front Panel The front panel menus are organized functionally so that operation is easy for novice and advanced users Refer to Chapter 3 Getting Started to learn about front panel operation 1 4 About the Modem Selecting Programmed Option Sets Option sets make it easy to use a
149. e Rate On MODULATION OPTS Menu or AT AP1 the modem selects the optimum data rate on the first connection The modem then monitors line conditions and if conditions deteriorate i e poor signal quality the modems retrain and determine the rate that the line can support within the range specified in Max Rate ATK MX and Min Rate AT MN Under poor line conditions the modem may fall back by more than one rate For example at a data rate of 28 8 kbps under poor line conditions the modem may retrain to 19 2 kbps instead of 21 6 kbps ARS adjustment is based on the High Low BER setting of the AT ZE RT Retrain option NOTES 1 The AT ZE RT Retrain command must be enabled set to Low BER or High BER if you use the adaptive rate setting 2 The modem does not fall forward in V 34 modulation mode with ARS enabled Line Probing Feature Operation in V 34 Mode The modem uses a line probing feature during the initial training sequence Line probing selects the maximum data rate that the line can support as well as the optimal baud rate and carrier frequency Due to this in the V 34 modulation modes V 34 Auto and V 34 Only the modem may require a longer training sequence NOTE For a summary of the supported data rates baud rates and carrier frequencies refer to the V 34 Modulation Mode Characteristics section in Chapter 1 If You Operate the Modem in V 34 Mode with ARS Disabled If you operate the modem in
150. e conditions occur more than 12 times the number is placed on the forbidden list and calls to this number are not allowed Belgium Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions three subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls within one hour the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing Country Specific Information C 24 Country Specific Information Finland Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem i
151. e modem 5 8 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface AT RD Redial Last Number Settings 0 1 Redial last number one time n The maximum number of redials allowed is country specific See the 326X Series Modem Country Specific Guide for more details Format AT RDn lt CR gt You may redial a failed call n times using the AT RD command The modem redials a call until a successful connection is made or until the call has been attempted n times The ATRD command causes the modem to redial the last number dialed So if an initial call fails and the telephone number is linked to another number the modem redials the linked telephone number S Registers S registers are memory locations for storing specific configuration and operating parameters S registers typically contain timing counting ASCII characters or command option values While communications software generally insulates you from the need to alter S register settings you may want to reconfigure or read the contents of an S register This section describes how to read and change S Register values This section is in two parts The first part describes the AT commands used to display and change S Register values The second part describes S Registers used by the modem Any S Register that is not stored in memory is reset to its default value when you Power up the modem Load a new Option Set Reinitialize memory Displaying and Changing S Regis
152. e modem between using An external telephone to manually dial a telephone call The modem to dial a stored or unstored telephone number Operating Status Displays The DTE19 2 RELIABL and Phase Jitter subcategories let you view modem operating status Example in the DTE 19 2 RELIABL subcategory pressing wr displays Operating status messages DTE DCE rate status Error correction data compression status EIA TIA signal status Disconnect reasons The modem s software revision level Circuit Quality Monitoring System CQMS parameter status For details refer to Appendix A For details on status displays refer to Chapter 1 AT Commands of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Option Sets Dialing Options These status subcategories let you choose a preconfigured option set and make other selections to determine how the modem will establish telephone connections For details on configuring option sets and other call establishment options in this category refer to Appendix A Where Do I Go from Here When you are familiar with the front panel configuration menu system and control keys refer to the following Chapter 4 for specific configuration instructions Appendix A to change parameter options and to enter and dial a telephone number The Reference Card shows the complete menu structure Chapter 6 for a discussion of typical problems and ways to correct them Using the Modem with a Network Man
153. e modem disconnects if 30 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE ATK SIS S30min The inactivity timeout is controlled by the value set in S Register 30 EC ID Error Correction ID Sets the ID number that modems exchange when they attempt to establish an MNP link AT K SLO Default The modem identifies itself with a generic MNP identification number Use this option unless you are certain that the remote modem s is a Telenetics or Motorola modem ATKSLI Codex The modem identifies itself with a special MNP identification number This allows one Tele netics or Motorola modem to recognize another during an MNP link negotiation Mode Data Transfer Mode Sets the data transfer mode for asynchronous applications or for synchronous applications with the 326X SDC The setting governs the modem s use of error correction NOTE To enable SDC select one of the reliable data transfer modes Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Dependent Auto Reliable ATX SMO Direct In Direct mode asynchronous or synchronous the modem does not use error correction In Direct mode EC DC OPT s menu options are disabled In data mode the DTE speed must match the modem speed AT SM1 Normal In normal mode asynchronous the modem does not use error correction or data compression The break type is assumed to be standard In data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different spee
154. e options are AsynSync or Bitsync see next parameter below LPDA2 The LPDA 2 auto call unit is used After selecting LPDA LPDA transmits data synchronously to enable SDC select Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable AT gt K SM None No auto call unit is used To enable SDC after selecting None choose a synchronous data format using the NoACU Form option discussed later in this table V25Form Determines the format of data when the ACU Select option is set to V25b To enable SDC after selecting V 25bis ACU choose one of the synchronous data formats AsynSync or Bitsync Select Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable LAT ZE SM Async Modem is compatible with asynchronous DTEs AsynSync Modem dials calls asynchronously but data is passed synchronously Bitsync The DTE uses the bit synchronous HDLC like protocol outlined in the ITU V 25bis specification Charsync The DTE uses the character synchronous protocol outlined in the ITU V 25bis specification NOTE Charsync is not available for the SDC operating mode NoAcu Form This option determines the format of data when ACU Select off To enable SDC after selecting ACU Select None choose NoAcu Form Sync Select Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable AT ZS SM Async Asynchronous data is passed in data mode Sync Synchronous data is passed in data mode Char Length Applies to asynchronous data applications
155. e or local distributor Audience and Assumptions This chapter assumes you understand AT command syntax and use To review refer to Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface This chapter assumes you understand how to use the front panel to navigate the configuration menus and how to alter configuration options To review refer to Chapter 3 Getting Started A 2 Configuration Quick Reference I gt I gt gt Data DCE Rate T D DTE Rate EC Mode PhaseJitter 0dg 1 Power Up In Old D p EC Mode DC Mode Frq Offset 0Hz 1 ressing at this 8 display toggles modem Tx Kb 0 Tx Level 0dbm 4 between taik gala Rx Kb 0 Rx Level 0dbm ales DCDMRTSMCTS Retrains 0 ATDS war Jk reos d o ao o J Dial From 1 View Phone 1 v n n a DSRODTR Echo Delay 0ms AOP ODLP ALP o Far Echo Lvl 0 gt DR 0 TI 0 0 D Nr Echo Lvl 0 Display Modem ID Phase Roll 0 s w rev lvl Eqlzr SNR 0dB SQ 0 EP 0 AT amp Z AT gt CN gt AT gt LN v gt ATD gt TEST OPTS TEST End Test LAL RDL LDL Pattern LAL Pat RDL Pat Busy Out Retrain d 4 4 4 gt D aan I gt I gt gt gt a 200 i F 2400 F wm MES 9600 Zen C344 Y 2W Lease 4L Y va Only Tan Lease F wopbis Auto AS Y Auto V32 F ve Only F V32 Only X V32 Uncoded Y Neabis Only F 212 Only F 103 O
156. e power cable into the modem and then into an outlet Figure 2 8 3261 3266 Modem Cabling 2 12 Installing the Modem Connecting the Modem to a Network Management System 326X Series Modems can be connected to the following Telenetics systems 9110 NMS Figure 2 9 9000 PC Figure 2 10 e 9000 UX Figure 2 10 Use the modem s NC IN and NC OUT 8 pin DIN connectors for NMS connections 9110 Terminal Step 1 Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter Step 2 Attach an 8 pin DIN adapter cable connector to the modem s NC IN connector NOTE The modem can be connected to either a 9 or 25 pin serial communication port on the rear of the 9110 DMS Figure 2 7 shows a 25 pin port connection Step 3 Attach the other end of the 8 pin DIN adapter cable to the DB 25 pin connector on the 9110 s network control 9 or 25 pin adapter cable Step 4 Attach the 25 or 9 pin connector to the appropriate port on the rear of the 9110 DMS Figure 2 9 Connecting to a 9110 NMS SS NC piAL pHON e Ee Junction Box to 9000 PC or 9000 UX Step 1 Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter Step 2 Attach an 8 pin DIN adapter cable connector to the modem s NC IN connector Step 3 Connect the 8 pin control channel connector on the other end of the 8 pin DIN adapter cable into its receptacle on a junction box Step 4 Attach the 50 pin connector on the network control cable to the jun
157. ear panel pinouts cross referenced with telco jack selections Dial Line Interface Models 3261 3266 Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE interface on the modem s rear panel Table C 4 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts Table C 4 Dial Line Interface Models 3261 3266 Dial Line Connector Canada Germany Hong Kong All Other Pin U S A Austria United Kingdom Japan Countries 1 MB LA Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 MBI Not Used B Not Used Not Used 3 MI Ring Bell Shunt Not Used Telset Ring Indicator 4 Ring LB Telset Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip b2 A Tip Tip 6 MIC Not Used Telset Tip Not Used Telset Tip 7 PR Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 PC a2 Not Used Not Used Country Specific Information C 19 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3261 3266 2 wire leased line connections are made via the LEASE LINE interface on the modems rear panel Table C 5 describes 2 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 5 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3261 3266 Leased Line Canada Germany Hong Kong All Other Connector Pin U S A Austria United Kingdom Japan Countries 1 Ring Tip Tip Ring Ring 2 Tip Ring Not Used Tip Tip 3 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Ring 5 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Tip 6 Not Used Not Used Ring Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 Not Used Not
158. ec AT KDD3 6 sec ATK DD3 EE alee DDS Using 7 AT DD9 20 sec AT KDD6 AT KDP Pause Delay AT KDR Off AT KDRO Off AT KDRO Auto Redial 1 AT DRI l1 AT KDRI 2 AT KDR2 2 AT DR2 3 ATXDR3 3 ATK DR AT LL Restricted Restricted in 3265 6 LAL Busy Out ATXLN Restricted Restricted in 3265 6 8 Restricted in 3265 6 DTE Pin 25 AT TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Length AT XTLO ATK TLO ATK TLO ATK TLO ATKTT 30 sec AT KTTO 30sec AT TTO 30sec AT KTTO 30sec AT TTO Call Timeout 60 sec AT TT2 60sec AT TT2 60sec AT KTT2 60sec ATK TT3 90 sec AT KTT3 90 sec AT KTT2 180sec AT KTT4 UsingS7 AT TTS DL TX Level Always 10dBm Always 9dBm Always 8dBm Always 9 dBm LL TX Level Always 6dBm Always 11dBm Always 12dBm Always 0 dBm NOTE If you issue the ATD command without an attached telephone number the modem responds ERROR C 8 Country Specific Information Feature Italy Japan Malaysia Netherlands ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted all models ATX Always 4 Call Progress ATX4 AT amp D7 Restricted 108 2 Bsy AT amp G Restricted Guard Tone AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 38 Always 33 Always 33 Always 38 Pulse Cycle AT amp P2 AT amp P1 AT amp PI AT amp P2 AT AA Manual AT AAO Answer Ring 2 ATK AA2 Ring 4 AT AAA AT Ze BD 4 Sec AT KBDI Always 4 sec Restricted Blind Dial Using S6
159. econfigured option sets are described along with sample applications that help you choose an option set Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface discusses the 326X Series Modem s AT ACU This chapter introduces The ACU industry standard AT and AT amp commands The Telenetics enhanced AT command syntax AT The AT commands that are referred to as action AT commands rather than configuration AT commands and S Register functions and settings Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Guide is a quick reference to problems and suggestions for correcting them This chapter assists you in isolating and correcting a problem before calling Telenetics Customer Support Center Appendix A Configuration Quick Reference provides reference material you need to change a modem s default settings It describes Configuration options with and without AT equivalents Result codes long and short forms S Registers Dial modifiers Numeric entry procedure The configuration menu structure Appendix B Cabling and Interface Pinouts contains the pinouts for the modem s rear panel connectors and associated cables Appendix C Country Specific Information discusses the cabling rear panel layouts pinouts and other modem features that are required or restricted by regulatory agencies for each country xiii Using the Documentation Set continued 326X Series Modem Reference Guide TEL 09925 Referen
160. ed Disab LPDA2 command frames are not recognized as commands TELCO DL TX Level Displays the modem s dial line transmit level which is set for your country s requirements OPT S 0 to 15 The modem is set to transmit at a level in the 0 to 15 dBm range LL TX Level Displays the modem s leased line transmit level which is set for your country s requirements 0 to 15 The modem is set to transmit at a level in the 0 to 15 dBm range Adjustable Transmit Levels V 34 Modulation Mode In the V 34 modulation mode the local and remote modems negotiate a transmit level for the dial leased line during the training sequence This allows the modems to select the lowest possible transmit level in order to maximize the signal to echo level in the receiver A typical range for the reduction of the transmit level is 0 to 14 dBm NOTE Although the modem negotiates a transmit level that may differ from the rate indicated for your country the front panel DL TX and LL TX Levels options remain the same The CQMS parameter Tx Level however displays the actual transmit level in use for a connection Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 35 e2ueJoJou oinp uoneanBiuo5 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 2 Front Panel Configuration Options Continued Parameter amp 326X Menu Option Description ACCESS
161. ed S Register Format AT x lt CR gt This command lets you change the value of an S Register stored in volatile memory The selected S Register is the last S Register that was accessed using an S Register command or the ATSn command x must be a number within the specified range for the S Register On power up S Register 0 is selected If you try to change the value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK S Register Descriptions S Register 0 Ring Count to Answer On Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 This S Register specifies the ring on which the modem automatically answers a call When set to 0 automatic answering is disabled and calls must be answered manually This register has no meaning unless Answer Using SO ACU OPT S 5 10 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface S Register 1 Ring Count Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Setting Range 0 to 255 This S Register counts the number of rings in an incoming telephone call If the modem is configured to answer AT AA or Answer S0 when S Register Is value equals S Register 0 s value the modem answers the call If no ring is received after a country specific time eight to 10 seconds the counter is reset to 0 S Register 2 Escape Code Character Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Setting Range Yes No 43 0 to 255 This S
162. eed character S Register 4 for details Check the delay between issuing the escape sequence and the ATH command Check whether the modem is set Set ACU Select AT ACU OPT s menu for AT ACU FILE TRANSFER Can t transfer all of a file or a file aborts in the middle of transfer Ensure that the DTE s flow control is the same as the modem s setting for example XON XOFF RTS CTS Check the modem s flow control settings Check whether your communications package supports speed conversion If your communications software supports speed conversion set modem s Speed Conver On AT amp SC1 It takes longer than expected to transfer a file Confirm which file transfer protocol you are using Use different protocol for example YMODEM Y GMODEM If operating the 326X SDC modem in SDC mode and you experience this type of problem BER tests do not work BER tests do not work in SDC mode because data is not framed Modem won t pass data Ensure your DTE protocol is HDLC SDLC like data If your protocol is not HDLC SDLC like use direct mode Check for data format mismatch Set data format option to match the DTE NRZ between modem and DTE AT DFO or NRZI AT KDF1 AT K DF Set modem for internal or external clock as required by your application Check clocking requirements Troubleshooting Guide 6 7 Bunoouse qnoujj Troubleshooting 326X Series Modem Troubleshoo
163. el pinouts cross referenced with telco jack selections 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3260 3265 2 wire leased line connections are made via the DIAL LINE interface on the rear panel Table C 2 describes 2 wire leased line interface pinouts Table C 2 2 Wire Leased Line Interface Models 3260 3265 Leased Line Canada Hong Kong Germany All Other Connector Pin U S A United Kingdom Austria Countries 1 Not Used Not Used LA Not Used 2 Not Used B Not Used Not Used 3 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Ring Not Used LB Ring 5 Tip A Not Used Tip 6 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 Not Used Not Used Not Used Refer to Canada U S A country specific sections for rear panel pinouts cross referenced with telco jack selections C 18 Country Specific Information Phone Connector Interface Models 3260 3265 Connection to an external telephone can be made using the PHONE connector on the modems rear panel Table C 3 describes PHONE connector interface pinouts Table C 3 Phone Line Interface Models 3260 3265 Phone Line Canada Hong Kong All Other Connector Pin U S A United Kingdom Countries 1 Not Connected Not Used Not Used 2 Not Connected B Not Used 3 MI Bell Shunt Not Used 4 Ring Not Used Telset Ring 5 Tip A Telset Tip 6 MIC Not Used Not Used 7 Not Connected Not Used 8 Not Connected Not Used Refer to Canada U S A country specific sections for r
164. em memory or dialing directly from the modem s front panel you can add dial modifiers to telephone numbers Tabl eA 4 lists the dial modifiers used in AT ACU applications Table A 4 Dial Modifiers Modifier Function Description W w Dial Wait Instructs the modem to stop and wait for a dial tone If the modem does not detect a dial tone after a specified period it aborts the call The factory default for dial wait is country specific refer to Appendix C for details In the U S A the default is two seconds You can change this interval using the Dial Wait option Pause Delay When any of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string or command line the modem pauses The factory default pause delay is three seconds This default can be extended with the Pause Delay command The comma modifier can be used as a command outside the dial string Pulse When either of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string if Dial Auto AT amp PT DIALING OPTS menu the Dial setting is not changed from Auto If set to other than Auto the pulse tone setting is modified to force pulse dialing If no pulse dial modifier is inserted in the number stream the modem dials according to the pulse tone setting of the Dial option in the front panel DIALING OPT S menu These modifiers can also be used as commands outside the dial string Tone When either of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string if
165. em or enclosure They contain no electronic components that can be serviced or replaced by a user Any attempt at user service of the 326X enclosure or opening of the 326X unit voids the product warranty Avertissement N essayez pas de r parer le modem ou le boitier Ils ne contiennent aucun composant lectronique pouvant trer par ou remplac par un usager Toute tentative de r paration du boitier du 326X par un usager ou toute intervention l int rieur du 326X annule la garan tie du produit Warnung Versuchen Sie nicht das Modem oder sein Geh use zu reparieren Es sind keine durch den Benutzer wartungs oder austauschfahige Teile darin enthalten Bei jeglichem Offnen oder Wartungsversuch am 326X bzw About the Modem 1 3 wapo ay 1noqy About the Modem Lightning Warning All Telenetics devices should be used in environments designed for computers and electronic equipment In areas susceptible to lightning take precautions to prevent damage to electronic equipment Contact your telephone company or an electronic accessories vendor for information on lightning protection equipment Customers experiencing problems caused by surges from lightning have eliminated such problems by installing appropriate surge suppressors on power and data lines connected to Telenetics devices Avertissement Tous les dispositifs Telenetics doivent tre utilis s dans des environnements concus pour des ordinateurs et
166. em to Option Set 3 no reconfiguration from this Option Set is necessary The AS 400 supports switched operation with call origination via a V 25bis compliant call establishment driver Using Option Set 3 allows it to be driven by APPC APPN the bit synchronous protocol supported by the IBM AS 400 In an AS 400 to AS 400 mainframe to mainframe environment the setting of the Calling Number parameter is critical to ensure the AS 400 operates properly with the modem Rather than entering the phone numbers you will be calling set CALLNBR to NONE This setting allows you to properly utilize V 25bis commands Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide describes bit synchronous protocol frame formats Option Set 4 Async Answering Central Site without ACU Models 3260 62 65 67 Changing Default Configuration Settings Depending on application requirements you may need to change the following The Buffer Delay feature AT KDB EC DC OPTS category when enabled allows buffered data in the communications link to be effectively transmitted to the other modem before the modems disconnect Enable this feature if your application does not ensure a complete transfer of data before the modems disconnect The default Answer option is country specific Refer to Appendix C to verify that this option is appropriate for your application In Option Set 4 the default option for ACU Select None If you want
167. ement data to the remote modem The channel is not disruptive to main channel user data Pass Thru controls how network control data is passed to the remote modem when the modem is configured as DIAL opt 1 The local modem connected to a network manager through the NC port does not forward all network management data received from the NC port to the remote modem over the in band secondary channel Only commands from the network manager to the remote modem are passed through Only remote modem responses are passed to the network manager opt 2 The modems do no filtering They pass all network management data received from the NC port to the in band secondary channel and from the in band secondary channel to the NC port SET RMT LL New Address nnn The SET RMT LL ADDR menu is for use with remote configuration on leased lines Using this ADDR Rmt Ser option you can set the remote modem s address nnnnnnn Rmt Nest Modem No A B SRCHRMT Rmt The SRCH RMT LL ADDR menu is for use with remote configuration on leased lines Using LL ADDR Ser nnnnnnn this option you can search for the remote modem s address Rmt Nest Modem No A B Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 36 Configuration Quick Reference Performing Numeric Entry The following options require you to enter information using the front panel or ACU Front Panel Option Description Enter Phone n Stores pho
168. enetics implement your equipment You can purchase and schedule Implementation Services by calling 949 455 4000 from within the U S The average lead time for implementation services is 5 business days from the time of the call Implementation services include running power up diagnostics configuring the equipment and connecting the equipment into existing networks A service engineer will be dispatched to your site to perform these services If you implement your equipment yourself Carefully follow the instructions in the following sections of this documentation set To install and power up Chapter 2 To configure and operate Chapter 3 If you have difficulty Chapter 6 provides a quick reference to problems you may encounter and suggestions for correcting them xix Telenetics Customer Information continued For service if your unit is under warranty and or you have a service contract Call 949 455 4000 When you call please have the following information ready Item Location or Description Model number Front of unit 3260 3261 3262 3263 3265 3266 3267 3268 For synchronous data compression models specify SDC Serial number Bottom of standalone unit edge of card unit Error message LCD Display Problem Description Software revision LCD Display from Modulation Mode 9600 T D press I to display the operating status Example DTE 19 2 RELIABL Press W until Display Modem
169. entral site auto answer applications no ACU Models 3260 62 65 67 4 Leased line application with dial restoral no ACU Models 3261 63 66 68 4 Table 4 2 Option Set Summary 326XFAST SDC Modem Option Application Set Async dial applications in which you are using the AT ACU to originate callsto 1 a central site default option set Sync dial A B restoral application 2 Sync dial only application 3 Sync leased line application with dial restoral no ACU Models 3261 63 66 68 4 4 6 Configuring the Modem Option Set Descriptions 326X V 32bis and V 34 Modems Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Using the AT ACU With Option Set 1 the modem communicates over dial lines using an asynchronous data format This option set is appropriate for home or office use where you plan to dial for example into a central site computer minicomputer an electronic bulletin board or a personal computer When you first install the modem it is set to power up with Option Set 1 as the factory default The modem recognizes the standard AT Command Set and the Telenetics enhanced AT Command set To satisfy common asynchronous communications software packages Option Set 1 holds several EIA 232 D ITU V 24 control signals asserted see Tables 4 1 and 4 2 The modem originates calls and answers incoming calls according to the setting of S Register 0 see the S Registers section in Chapter 5 for more information At the beginning of each conne
170. ents Industry Canada Equipment Attachment Limitations Canadian Emissions Statement ssuuse Rear Panel Pinous iare rtt be rtt perte a Hye i UE E Telco Option GET iiis ike ee etiarn ires Denmark Blind Dialing netten Hong Kong and United Kingdom BABT Regulations Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 3 Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 7 Compliance with BABTSITS 82 01 C and BABT SITS 82005S D Compliance with BS6305 Clause 6 2 BS6320 Clause 7 2 Ringer Equivalence Number REN Compliance with BABT SITS 83 08 A Clause 1 2 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 5 2 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 3 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 4 Compliance with DTI 83 009 Compliance with B88301 1 eerte nins Compliance with BABT SITS 83 009 Section D Installation of Telephone Socket ene Application for Installation of Telephone Socket c nem PCC EE PCC RebsulatiODS 55 ottenere repeteret Dial Line Jack Tye EET Rear Panel Pinuts 1er ttr tete internes Dial and Leased Line Transmit Levels Making Telephone to Modem Connections Telco Option ANG iuis ie coit etit ei pira rm Declaring The
171. epublic Ireland Norway United Kingdom Denmark Israel Portugal U S A Finland Italy South Africa NOTE References to the 326X Series Modem apply to 326XV 32bis 326X and 326X SDC Series Modems unless stated otherwise Country Support Country approval is an ongoing process I fyou have questions about approval and availability in your country contact a Telenetics sales representative or distributor Country Specific Information C 3 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Installation Notes This section provides information useful when installing the modem in countries other than the U S A and Canada Models 3265 3266 Warning Ports that are capable of connecting to other apparatus are defined as SELV To ensure conformity with EN60950 ensure that these ports are only connected to ports of the same type on other apparatus Avertissement Les ports qui sont susceptibles d tre connect s des quipements sont d sign s comme TBTS Pour garantir la conformit la norme EN 60950 n interconnecte ces ports qu avec des ports du m me type sur des autres mat riels Warnung Anschlusse die mit anderen Geraten verbindet werden konnen sind als SELV beschrieben Um Konformitat mit EN 60950 zu versichern sichern Sie es daB diese Anschlusse nur mit den des selben Type auf anderen Geraten verbindet werden All Models These units are not suitable for connection to an IT power distribution system nor for use in a host
172. er 9671 add the conductor capacitance of 30 pF ft and the shield capacitance of 55 pF ft for a total capacitance of 85 pF ft If you are operating at a rate of 19 2 kbps the maximum allowable cable length to attain throughput of 19 2 kbps is 28 24 feet Multiplying 28 24 by the total cable capacitance of 85 pF ft yields a maximum allowable cable capacitance of 2410 4 pF which is acceptable in accordance with Table B 4 DTE Cable Diagnostics This section helps determine whether there is a problem with a DTE cable Perform the following steps before continuing with installation If you continue to experience problems with data transmission after choosing a cable and running the diagnostics in this section the problem may be with your DTE or modem If the modem is not installed at a host site perform the following steps 1 Enable the AT ACU if not already enabled with async echo on reinitializing the modem will also enable the AT ACU with async echo set to on Ensure that rate and parity of the modem and the DTE are identical 2 Send data to the modem from the DTE NOTE Do not substitute test equipment for the DTE as the DTE s receivers drivers are used in this test 3 If echoed data from the modem as received by the DTE matches the transmitted message send the status screen AT ST lt CR gt command 4 If there are no errors in either of the previous tests the cable is appropriate for your application B 10 Cabling
173. eren von Produktkarten entriegelt und ge ffnet werden Por razones de seguridad la puerta frontal deber permanecer cerrada en todo momento a menos que se proceda a la instalaci n extracci n o configuraci n de las tarjetas del producto Important Information About the Modular Nest Enclosure This notice applies to cooling airflow around the Modular Nest unit Caution Failure to properly arrange cables could impede cooling airflow possibly resulting in damage to the equipment i Mise en Garde Un mauvais agencement des c bles risque d emp cher une bonne ventilation et par cons quent de causer des dommages mat riels Vorsicht Die inkorrekte Anordnung von Kabeln kann den K hlluftstrom behindern und zu Ger tesch den f hren i Precaucion La disposici n defectuosa de los cables puede impedir el flujo de aire fr o resultando en posibles dafios para el equipo 2 10 Installing the Modem Cabling the Modem This section explains how to connect the modem to 1 A PC or DTE asynchronous or synchronous terminal 2 A dial telephone line 3 A telephone cable between handset and modem 4 A leased telephone line if appropriate 5 The power cord 6 Network management system cables if appropriate For models 3260 3265 connect modem cables in the order shown in Figure 2 7 For models 3261 3266 connect modem cables in the order shown in Figure 2 8 Warning The modem must be grounded throug
174. erminal to the remote modem Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing signal to the local terminal to synchronize transmitted data Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the remote modem Timing signal extracted from the received carrier Local modem transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data Initiated at the local terminal and passed to local modem causing it to initiate a local analog loopback test Not Used 108 1 Sent by the DTE this signal causes connection of the modem to the phone line 108 2 Sent by the DTE this signal allows connection of the modem to the phone line Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 5 sjnould eoeyelu Interface Pinouts Table B 2 ITU V 35 Modem Computer Interface Connections Continued Pin V 35 Signal Definition 21 Loop 2 Control Signal initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem causing it to initiate remote digital loopback test V 54 Loop 2 22 RingIndicator RI Passed from local modem to local terminal On during ringing off between rings and when no ring received 23 External Transmit Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs Clock B providing clock to the local modem 24 External Transmit Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs Clock A providing clock to the local modem 25 Test Indicate TI Local modem signals to local terminal when local modem is in test The terminal can
175. escription of how the modem s access security and call features operate refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide AT KZVO Dis Password and callback features are disabled AT ZVI Intern A single password stored in modem memory is checked against the received password This password is stored in modem memory using the AT gt ZI Enter Group PW command Only Mngr The network management system verifies the received password Although displayed at the accessible modem this selection is not accessible by the front panel orAT ACU with an NMS Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 33 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uolyeinBiyyuog Configuration Quick Reference Table A 2 Front Panel Configuration Options Parameter amp 326X Menu Option Description ACU OPT S ACU Select Determines which Auto Call Unit ACU the modem uses To enable SDC select an ACU ACU Select a bit synchronous data format for the AT and V 25bis ACUs and Mode Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable AT gt K SM AT The AT auto call unit is used To enable SDC after selecting AT ACU select a data format AT amp M The options are Sync Data DTR Dial or Man Dial Refer to the AT amp M option description inTable A 1 V25b The V 25bis auto call unit is used To enable SDC after selecting V25b select a data format AT amp M Th
176. ese selections result in Disconnect in the specified time after the modem leaves data mode and starts to retrain Values of S10 other than the ones specified above disable the DCE Disconnect feature Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 13 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU S Register 11 DTMF Tone Duration Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 72 Range 50 to 255 country specific S Register 11 defines the duration spacing of tones in milliseconds in DualTone Multifrequency DTMF dialing This register has no meaning unless the Tone Length option under the DIALING OPT S is set to S11 Refer to Appendix C Country Specific Information for the ranges supported by each country S Register 12 Escape Code Guard Time Stored in Nonvolatile Memory No Status Only No Default Setting 50 1 second Range 0 to 255 This S Register sets the interval that must be present on either side of the escape code in order for the modem to recognize the escape command and enter command mode This prevents the characters from putting the modem in command mode if they are contained in data The value of S Register 12 is multiplied by 0 02 to determine the number of seconds For example the value of the factory default 50 is one second If S Register 12 is set to 0 the speed at which you enter the escape sequence is not a factor S Register 18 Test Timer Stored in Nonvolatile Mem
177. est Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted in Rel 4 0 and Restricted earlier not restricted in Rel 4 1 and later ATX Always 4 ATX4 Always 4 ATX4 Call Progress AT amp D7 108 2 Bsy AT amp G 550 AT amp GI Guard Tone 1800 AT amp G2 in 3265 7 Always 1800 AT amp G2 in 3266 8 AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 40 Always 33 Pulse Cycle AT amp PO AT amp P1 AT AA Manual AT gt K AAO Answer Ring 2 AT AA2 AT BD Restricted Always 4 sec Blind Dial AT BD1 AT KCD Loss Dis AT KDD 15 sec AT KDD5 6sec AT KDD3 _ Always 6 seconds 2sec AT DDO Dial Wait 30 sec AT KDD7 12 sec AT DD4 AT KDD3 4sec AT KDD2 40 sec AT zk DD 6sec AT DD3 S7 AT Ze DD9 AT Ze DP Always 3 sec Always 4 sec Pause Delay AT DR Off AT gt K DRO Auto Redial 1 AT DRI 2 AT DR2 3 AT Ze DR ATLL Restricted LAL Busy Out AT LN Restricted DTE Pin 25 ATK TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Length AT TLO AT gt K TLO AT K TLO AT gt K TLO ATKTT 30 sec AT2KTTO 30sec AT2KTTO 30sec AT KTTO Call Timeout 60 sec AT KTT2 60sec AT KTT2 60 sec AT KTT2 DL TX Level Always 13dBm Always 9dBm Always 9dBm Set to 9dBm adjustable from 0 to 15 dBm LL TX Level Always 13dBm Always 6dBm Always 13dBm Set to OdBm adjustable from 0 to 15 dBm Country Specific Information C 11 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Operating Notes This section summarizes useful operating inform
178. for modems A dedicated telephone line circuit permanently connecting two or more locations and used solely by one customer who leases the line Light Emitting Diode 1 A method of feeding a received signal back from a point in a data link to the receiver at the site where the data was originated Commonly used to test portions of a data link to isolate faulty equipment or data lines 2 The feeding back of data from a point in a data path to the transmitting source for testing 3 A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to the originator which compares the message with the original transmission Loopback testing can occur within a locally attached device or can be conducted remotely over a communications circuit Feature that enables the 326X to be used in an IBM dial and leased line restoral applications using LPDA2 Dial and Disconnect commands Modulator demodulator enabling digital data to be sent over analog transmission facilities Modulation MNP Multiplexer Off hook Parity bit PBX Phase jitter Point to point Port Protocol PSTN PTT QAM RS 232 D RTS SDC SDLC Start bit Stop bit STX Systematic changing of properties e g amplitude frequency phase of an analog signal to encode and convey digital information Microcom Networking Protocol An asynchronous communications protocol that provides error correction 1 Any multiport device that allows two or more users to
179. formation icta tete tiet db peer da br taa MEORUM C 28 dura MC M C 28 DOC Registration and Requirements ocsi C 28 Industry Canada Equipment Attachment Limitations C 29 Canadian Emissions Statement sccisestiees candela cbe i a C 29 Rear Pane Pinoys En C 30 ISlpo rica eed E C 31 Deoanmgde AT E C 32 Hong Kong and United Kingdom BABT Regulations C 32 Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 3 sues C 32 Compliance with BS6328 Part 1 1982 Section 8 7 esses C 32 Compliance with BABTSITS 82 01 C and BABT SITS 82005S D C 33 Compliance with BS6305 Clause 6 2 BS6320 Clause 7 2 C 33 Ringer Equivalence Number REN sscsicccisscivorsscsisovsasisnvvscaresessacceviesieorses C 33 Compliance with BABT SITS 83 08 A Clause 1 2 sss C 34 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 5 2 C 34 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 3 C 34 Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 4 C 34 Compliance with DTI 33 0091 Lian aces iieu eniinn Ein bte C 35 Compliance with BS scsieccssevsossesuscoasdestasadneivecsiovsersnetverdasueiessawderdcants C 35 Compliance with BABT SITS 83 009 Section D eese C 35 Country Specific Information C 1 uoneuuoju oyi2eds Anuno5 C
180. ge Determines when the AT connect message is sent to the DTE AT K MSO After CD The AT connect message is sent to the DTE after DCD is raised AT EMS Before CD The AT connect message is sent to the DTE before DCD is raised Max Rate Maximum Rate Sets the maximum rate at which the modems communicate over the analog network Options available vary with the modulation mode AT ZS MS 300 AT MX1 1200 AT KMX2 2400 AT KMX3 4800 AT KMX4 7200 AT KMX5 9600 AT KMX6 12 0 AT KMX7 14 4 AT gt KMX8 16 8 V 34 modems only AT gt K MX9 19 2 V 34 modems only AT gt KMX10 21 6 V 34 modems only AT gt KMX11 24 0 V 34 modems only AT gt KMX12 26 4 V 34 modems only Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 24 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT gt KMX13 28 8 V 34 modems only AT gt KMX14 31 2 V 34 modems only AT KMXI5 33 6 V 34 modems only default Buffers Buffer Option Lets you specify whether normal or reduced size buffers store data received from a local DTE Use this parameter if you have DTE to DTE flow control enabled to reduce the amount of data sent to the remote DTE when a flow off condition is received at the local DTE ATK NBO Regular Normal capacity buffers are used AT NBI Reduced Reduced sized buffers are
181. ge tives reed sur caa 2 4 Choosing a SIE e iS 2 4 Connecing the Modeni dou woes seupsietn sie Cer sila nex nU aana aN OR cx sue Beds EE Rad 2 5 Cc uscudbonicdn M 2 5 Ferite Cylinders emm 2 7 Cabling the Modem cciscesecesiiesssashesassauionsvcuvtinsscurteraauetecdsanvnssasiivevanieiensabunts 2 11 Connecting the Modem to a Network Management System 2 13 Turning on the ihm 2 14 Automstic Selfe KE 2 15 After Installing the Modem 1 4 rnnt rari inrer r pesas cubos 2 15 Installing the Modem 2 1 w poN eui PBumeisu Installing the Modem Introduction This chapter describes how to install and connect a 326X Series Modem In this chapter you Unpack the modem Choose an appropriate site to install the modem Familiarize yourself with the modem s rear panel and connectors Connect the modem to a PC or other data terminal equipment DTE Connect the modem to a telephone handset if appropriate and to the dial leased telephone line jacks Attach ferrite cylinders if necessary Connect the modem to a Network Management System NMS if appropriate Turn on the modem and run the unit s automatic self test IMPORTANT 7elephone company and governmental regulations vary by country Your modem s rear panel layout and cabling may vary from that shown in this guide Refer to Appendix C for a description of the modem rear panel and ca
182. gh it often represented in dB A circuit that allows alternating transmit and receive signals but not both simultaneously High level data link control ITU specified bit oriented data link control protocol any related control of data links by specified series of bits rather than by control characters Base 16 number system with digits ranging from 0 to F International Telecommunications Union Formerly CCITT Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU V 13 signaling allows your modem to communicate with non Telenetics modems This signaling operates when the modem is configured for synchronous mode 2400 bps modem standard for use with dial and leased line circuits Glossary 3 Aiesso 5 Glossary ITU V 24 ITU V 25 bis ITU V 32 ITU V 32 bis ITU V 42 ITU V 42 bis ITU TS V 34 Interface LAPM Leased line LED Loopback LPDA2 Modem 4 Glossary An electrical standard for interconnecting data communications equipment and data terminal equipment established by the ITU It is the most commonly used computer modem interface Nearly equivalent to EIA TIA 232 D An ITU specified serial Auto Call Unit ACU for operation with both asynchronous and synchronous DTE equipment The standard for 2 wire full duplex modems operating at up to 9600 bps for use on the general switched telephone network and on leased telephone circuits A modulation standard that extends the speed of 2 wire leased line a
183. gure the modem quickly If you are unfamiliar with the AT command set or the modem front panel refer to the section Remote Access Reset later in this chapter Once this is done you can use a remote modem to configure the local modem If the modem is part of a network and you have a Network Management System NMS installed consult your network manager for configuration information Communications Software Package Operating Notes This section provides information for configuring the 326X Series Modem to work with communications software packages Configuring the Modem for Use with Communications Software Select the Modem s Preconfigured Option Set 1 Option Set 1 the modem s factory default setting is for use with communications software in asynchronous dial applications where the AT ACU originates calls Refer also to Operating Notes at the end of this section Configuration Option Sets 4 2 Configuring the Modem What to Select in the Communications Software Package s Modem Menu List 1 Select Telenetics 3260 Modem Codex 3260 Modem Motorola 3260 Modem or another 3260 option from the package s modem list Packages that directly support the 326X Series Modem support industry standard commands and Telenetics enhanced commands making further configuration unneces sary 2 If a 3260 option does not appear in the list contact the software manufacturer for the latest version of the package which should h
184. h its electrical plug If you cannot use the safety plug with your electrical outlet consult a licensed electrician to ensure that the modem is properly grounded Unplug the modem from the power outlet before having it serviced Avertissement Le modem doit tre mis la terre lors de son branchement Si vous n avez pas de cartouche fusible consultez un lectricien pour assurer la mise terre ad quate de votre appareil Mettez le hors tension avant de commencer toute r paration Warnung Das Modem wird normalerweise ber den Stecker geerdet Wenn Sie den Schuko Stecker nicht an die Steckdose anschlie en k nnen wenden Sie sich an einen zugelassenen Elektriker um sicherzustellen da das Ger t korrekt geerdet ist Trennen Sie das Ger t vor dem ffnen des Geh uses vom Netz Installing the Modem 2 11 w poN eui PBumeisu Installing the Modem Interface Cable Step 1 Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter Step 2 Install an EIA TIA 232 D cable between the modem s DTE connector and the Telephone J AL DTE or PC serial port Tighten the cable connector retaining screws Cable Dial Leased Step 3 Unplug the telephone cord from the wall jack and plug it into the modem s Line PHONE LINE connector Nes i Step 4 Attach the modular audio cable provided with the modem to the modem s DIAL od LINE connector Connect the cable to the RJ 11 dial line wall jack Step 5 Plug the power
185. hat indicates the jack housing style Jacks specified under FCC Part 68 fit into one of the following categories Permissive voice or Programmable data 6 Pin Voice Jack Permissive This jack type primarily allows voice signals transmitted across lines designated for voice transmission This jack type also allows data signals to be transmitted across voice grade lines 8 Pin Data Jack Programmable This jack type is designed to ensure voiceband data transmission integrity across an interface cable The jack is referred to as programmable because it contains a resistor that allows the phone company to adjust for the optimum output power level before the DCE is connected to the line The following jack types can be used with your modem Jack Type Description RJLIC This 6 pin modular jack type is the most common permissive data mode voice jack arrangement found in the home or office This jack operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service RJ16C This 6 pin modular jack type is a special permissive data mode jack arrangement that allows use of an exclusion key telephone RJ45S This 8 pin modular jack type is the most common programmable data mode data jack arrangement it permits the use of an exclusion key telephone This jack also operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service RJ4MB This 8 pin modular programmable data mode jack ar
186. he DTE rate as shown in the front panel throughput and link utilization status display Poor throughput delay Check the setting of the flow Use Tx clock or CTS for flow control and Rx clock for control option throughput minimization delay 6 8 Troubleshooting Guide 326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution If operating the 326X Series Modem on a leased line and you experience this type of problem Modem won t connect Check leased line cable for For a 3261 2 wire leased line cable pinouts should NOTE CQMS conformance to 2 or 4 wire be Pin 1 ring and Pin 2 tip parameters are only pinouts U S Canada only For a 3261 4 wire leased line cable pinouts should valid once the modems be are connected in data Pins 1 TX Ring and 2 TX Tip mode Pins 7 RX Tip and 8 RX Ring For pinouts for your country and model refer to Appendix C Confirm the Tx and Rx connections for your leased line jack Ensure one modem is set for answer and one for originate Ensure modem is set to match line type 2 or 4 wire If you are still experiencing f errors are found on either end contact Telenetics problems run an LAL pattern Customer Support or your local distributor test on both modems If the LAL pattern test passes you may have line problems contact your telephone company Check the modulation Ensure the local and remote modem s modulation modes
187. he modem automatically adjusts its baud rate to the communications software baud rate and parity This rate remains constant during the established connection Configuring the Modem 4 3 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Direct Operating Mode If you select Mode Direct EC DC OPT S category Speed conversion and flow control are not supported If the communications package does not support speed detect change the 326X s modulation mode to Auto V 32 and after a connection is established change the communications software rate to match the modem s connection rate If the communications package supports data rates higher than 9 6 kbps set the modem s maximum rate Max Rate AT MX to the higher rate and disable the adaptive rate feature before placing or answering calls Ensure that the package s speed and the modem s connection rate match when the connection is established NOTE Some communications software packages support the automatic speed detect feature which automatically matches the modem s baud rate with the software package s baud rate Transferring a File Refer to the communications package instructions for the procedure for transferring files using the communications software package s supported protocols Ring Messages Some communications packages wait for ring messages to be received before the modem answers incoming calls The 326X Series Modem must be set to the communications software package s ba
188. he phone line 21 140 Remote Digital Signal initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem causing it Loopback Test to initiate remote digital loopback test V 54 Loop 2 22 CE 125 Ring Indicator Passed from local modem to local terminal On during ringing off RI between rings and when no ring received 23 CH CI 111 112 Data Signal Rate CI passed from modem to terminal indicating signaling rate CI is set Select Indicator high for data rates greater than 2400 bps otherwise it is set low CI is also set low while the modem is disconnected The function of this pin is determined by the setting of rear panel Switch 1 CH input signal has no effect on modem operation 24 DA 113 External Signal Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs Element Timing providing clock to the local modem See Clock External setting 25 142 Test Indicate TI Local modem signals to local terminal when local modem is in test The terminal can initiate a Busy Out condition on this circuit The status of this signal is determined by the status of rear panel Switch 2 and front panel option DTE Pin 25 configured for Test or Busy Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 3 sjnould eoeyelu Interface Pinouts ITU Recommendation V 35 Modem to Computer Interface For compatibility with DTEs operating with a V 35 interface the 326X FAST SDC Series Modem supports an optional ITU Recommendation V 35 Modem to Computer interface Conne
189. heating do not place a modem on its side Refer to Appendix C for site requirements for operating the modem in your country Connecting the Modem Rear Panel Connectors RA d C Figures 2 2 and 2 3 show 3260 3265 and 3261 3266 standalone modem rear panels The rear of the modem has the following connectors Modular jacks for making DIAL LINE and PHONE connections 3260 3265 Modems or DIAL LINE PHONE and LEASE LINE connections 3261 3266 Modems One 6 position Dual Inline Package DIP switch This switch hard configures some operating functions When the modem is shipped from the factory all switches are in the Off up position DIP switch selections cannot be overridden by remote front panel configuration Refer to Appendix C for DIP switch function details Network Control NC IN and OUT ports for connecting to Telenetics Network Management Systems NMS ADTE port for connecting to a PC or DTE An AC power receptacle to accept an AC line cord An AC power switch Refer to Appendix C for a description of the modem s rear panel For information on 326X Series Modem Card backplanes models 3262 3263 3267 and 3268 refer to the addendum 326X Series Modem Cards shipped with your backplane E DIAL LINE PHONE Le NC mr RR 10N6 om IN DTE TTE or Figure 2 2 32
190. her case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions nine subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of 10 calls the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 30 minutes After 30 minutes the number is available for dialing Country Specific Information C 23 uoneuuojul oyioeds Anuno5 Austria Forbidden Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as forbidden calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the forbidden list The forbidden list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as forbidden calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call or e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions 11 subsequent redial attempts are allowed If either of the above call failur
191. hone book entries are deleted Password protection is disabled and the password is set to 0000 6 To use the password protection feature again open Switch 4 on the modem rear panel set it to up position Dial Dial Type ATK PTO Tone The modem uses tone dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a telephone number ATPT Pulse The modem uses pulse dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a telephone number Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 26 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATK PT2 Auto The auto call unit attempts to tone dial when initiating a call If tone dialing is not possible pulse dialing is used For this feature to work correctly the first character in a dial string must be a digit A T or P in the dial string overrides this setting for that dial string ATK PWx y Change Pass Lets you change the modem s password Enter word AT k PWold password new password lt CR gt If successful the modem responds with OK Rmt Acc Remote Access Determines whether your modem can be configured by a remote modem AT ERAO Disable The local modem cannot be configured by a remote modem ATKRAI Enable The local modem can be configured by a remote modem Rmt Cnfg Initiate Terminate
192. iguring an Option Set i c soesesseoursssseuvsccaunduvonssuvsecaiwuvsacasiursssvewes 4 10 toppon Set E 4 11 326X V 32bis and 326XFAST Modem Application Examples 4 16 Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU 4 17 Option Set 2 Sync Answering Central Site Without ACU 4 18 Option Set 3 Sync Calls to Central Site V 25bis ACU 4 18 Option Set 4 Async Answering Central Site without ACU E E 4 19 Option Set 4 Synchronous Leased Line Applications with Dial Restoral Models E 4 20 326XFAST SDC Modem Application Examples ess 4 21 SDC EE 4 21 Configuring the Modem for SDC Operation eese 4 22 SDC Sample Applications 2s na Dei etri a EN UE n FRI FORE Re 4 22 Remote Access 4l M 4 28 Saar a oen mated nores we lane Ee E T A 4 28 When Remote Access Reset Is Disabled retiro 4 28 Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface MAORI me P 5 2 What is the Attention AT Command Set esses 5 3 What Role Does Communications Software Play sss 5 3 Dung AI COBIIIBS eicere ces sve Ore eimi eas RR d ENT ER een avons n A 5 3 Entering AT Command Lines ios seas irrito cosusvoocasevvseavewsesveures 5 3 hib np i NE 5 5 Contents continued The Escape E E 5 5 Non Configuration AT Commande 5 einer inerenti tienne 5 6 E aio MINNIE EN
193. iguring the Modem s Dual In line Package DIP Switches A 44 Configuration Quick Reference A 1 99Ud198J9Y YIINHO uolyeinBiyuog Configuration Quick Reference Configuration Quick Reference Menu Trees This appendix contains information useful for configuring and operating the modem Configuration options and functions Table A 1 lists AT commands Commands are cross referenced to front panel options Parameters whose options are restricted due to country requirements are shaded gray Table A 2 lists configuration options that do not have AT equivalents These options are organized by the main menu in which they appear The menu structure Figures A 1 to A 4 front panel options option settings and AT AT amp AT command equivalents and default settings The Reference Card shows the menu tree as well Numeric entry information how to use the front panel control keys to change numeric values of configuration settings S Registers cross referenced to AT Commands and front panel options Dial modifiers Result codes numeric short form and word long form Instructions for configuring Dual In line Package DIP switches which let you override configuration settings normally selected through AT commands or the front panel For More Detail For more information on configuration order the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide by contacting your Telenetics sales representativ
194. il both modems train and are ready to pass data DCD is on in data mode DCD drops on a disconnect momentarily AT amp C3 Remote This setting applies to simulated half duplex applications and works only if the remote modem also supports RTS DCD signaling When the remote DTE turns RTS on DCD is forced on at the local modem The local modem can receive data only during this period Once the remote DTE drops RTS DCD at the local modem follows The Rem RTS DCD option lets you choose the type of RTS DCD signaling AT amp C4 Wink DCD is always on however it drops after disconnect and remains low momentarily DTR DTR Control This command determines how the modem interprets the DTR signal The local DTE uses DTR Pin 20 to signal the modem AT amp DO High The modem ignores DTR from the DTE The modem reads DTR as always high Choose this option for DTR CTS flow control with error correction or if the DTE does not provide DTR signal AT amp D1 Escape When ACU Select AT and AT Form Async AT amp M the modem enters the AT Escape mode when DTR goes off while the modem is in data or test mode Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 9 o2ueJoJog oinp uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Command Parameter amp Option Description AT amp
195. inates error correction negotiation saving approximately an additional half second For proper operation enable this option and ensure that AT SM Mode AT ZE EC Error Correction and AT ZE DC Data Compression EC DC OPT S category are set the same in both modems NOTE Selecting Lvl3 in the V 34 modulation mode bypasses error correction negotiation and improves the connect time of the modems as described above If your local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation by selecting Fast Call Lv13 the modems use LAPM error correction with V 42bis data compression only For proper operation enable this option in both modems and ensure that the AT ZE SM Mode is set the same in both modems AT K FLO ATK FLI ATK FL2 AT FL3 AT ZS PLA Flow Off XON XOFF DTR CTS RTS CTS XON XOFF PT Flow Control Allows the modems and DTEs in a link to control the flow of data when buffers near their capacity Use some type of flow control when operating in the Normal or Reliable mode Check the DTE s manual to ensure that the DTE supports the type of flow control you select Flow control is disabled The local modem and DTE operate flow control by passing characters embedded in the data stream between them The XOFF character signals the transmitting device to stop sending data The XON character lets the halted device start sending data NOTE XON XOFF flow control is not supported in SDC mode In asynchronous
196. ing Started 3 11 paues Dumegp Chapter 4 Configuring the Modem Contents Pic o P 4 2 Communications Software Package Operating Notes sse 4 2 Configuring the Modem for Use with Communications pr 4 2 EE debo eT ee 4 3 If the Communications Software and Modem Do Not Operate 4 5 Preparing for Operation steigt 4 5 Reinitializing Memory from the Front Panel eeeessse 4 5 Reinitializing Memory Using the AT amp F Command 4 5 Configuration Option Sete P 4 6 What js an Ophion SOIT soe sascepiastcsleavelprensts prat bens uy nate Eee 4 6 Configuring an Option Set secscccscosanteniessebensecsnsssecsniurscasuetecs sauvsawantarersiawrs 4 10 Op on Set Dermis Laus cos ceo coii raae EE EE due pela ap 4 11 326X V 32bis and 326XFAST Modem Application Examples 4 16 Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU 4 17 Option Set 2 Sync Answering Central Site Without ACU 4 18 Option Set 3 Sync Calls to Central Site V 25bis ACU 4 18 Option Set 4 Async Answering Central Site without ACU Models 3260 62 65 67 sese 4 19 Option Set 4 Synchronous Leased Line Applications with Dial Restoral Models 3261 63 66 68 esses 4 20
197. ing descriptions 4 20 Configuring the Modem 326XFAST SDC Modem Application Examples This section provides application examples for each SDC option set and notes options you may need to change from factory default settings for each option set This section includes the following SDC Pre Operation Notes read this before configuring the modem Configuring The Modem for SDC Operation configuration options that are critical to ensure optimum network performance on an SDC connection SDC Sample Applications examples of common SDC applications SDC Pre Operation Notes This section contains important information for using the 326X FAST SDC Modem in SDC operating mode Read this section before configuring the unit Operational Requirements 326XFAST SDC modems require framed HDLC SDLC like data NOTE BER tests do not operate in an SDC environment because the data is not framed 326XFAST SDC modems support an NRZ or NRZI data encoding method Refer to the DTE documentation for information on the data encoding method the DTE supports Refer to Appendix A Data Form AT gt kDF option for details on NRZ NRZI data encoding methods Optimizing Network Performance The 326X FAST SDC modem provides front panel displays of RX TX Throughput and Link Utilization Higher values indicate more efficient utilization lower values indicate less efficient usage These values are affected by the attached DTE and protocol characte
198. initiate a Busy Out condition on this circuit Differences EIA TIA 232 D and ITU RateV 35 Interfaces There are some differences in how your modem operates when using EIA TIA 232 D and ITU Rate V 35 electrical interfaces These differences and settings to use when operating witha V 35 interface are as follows When a V 35 Electrical The Following Options Interface is Selected Cannot Be Selected Set Pin 11 is not supported Mode External Mode AT CA2 Originate LAT ZC AO Answer AT CAL or Auto AT KCA3 Pin 12 is not supported NA NA Pin 13 is not supported NA NA Pin 14 is not supported Ext Cntrl Pin 14 Ext Cntrl Pin 20 AT K OCO AT K OC1 default RestorezFP 116 NA AT RE3 RestorezFP 116 ACU AT K RE6 Pin 16 is not supported NA NA Pin 23 is not supported NA Switch S1 on modem rear panel to the Off up position DIAL LINE LEASE PRIVATE LINE PHONE Connector Pinouts DIAL LINE LEASE PRIVATE LINE and PHONE connector pinouts vary by country Consult Appendix C for your country s pinouts B 6 Cabling and Interface Pinouts NC Network Control Port Pinouts Cabling Table B 3 describes the pinouts for the IN and OUT NC Network Control ports Table B 3 Network Control Port Connector Pinouts Pin In Out 1 Not Connected User Special In 2 TXD In TXD Out 3 RXD In RXD Out 4 RTS In RTS Out 3 Not Connected Not Connected 6
199. ion 1 using Enter Phone AT amp Z 9600 T D category 3 Set DTR 108 1 AT amp D TERMINAL OPTS category When DTR is raised the modem will dial the specified call If the DTE does not require EIA signal pins to be held high adjust the EIA settings TERMINAL OPTS category to match your application requirements n Option Set 1 the modem is set for XON XOFF software flow control If your application requires hardware flow control change the Flow setting AT KFL TERMINAL OPTS category Configuring the Modem 4 17 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Option Set 2 Sync Answering Central Site Without ACU Changing Default Configuration Settings Depending on application requirements you may need to change the following In Option Set 2 the default for network timing is Clock Internal AT amp X MODULATION OPTS category It may be necessary to change the timing to external or loopback depending on the network clocking source In Option Set 2 the default for ACU Select None If you want an ACU to operate the modem select an ACU and a data format Customize the DTE port as follows Set the modem s DTE rate to match the synchronous DTE s rate using DTE Rate AT KDE TERMINAL OPTS category refer to Appendix A for parameter and setting descriptions The default Answer option is country specific Refer to Appendix C to verify that this option is appropriate for your application f the D
200. ion mode you must ensure that the Max Rate AT MX and Min Rate AT MN parameter options are within the valid range for the mode Some 326XFAST SDC models are available with a V 35 compatible interface This unit has a DB25 connector so a converter is required Product Family Model Numbers Telenetics refers to the product family as 326X because the last digit denotes the modem model Model numbers X are as follows This Model Number Denotes 3260 3261 3262 3263 Models for use in the U S A 3265 3266 3267 3268 Equivalent models respectively for international use provided in country specific setups 3260 3265 Standalone models for Two wire dial operation Two wire leased line operation xi Using the Documentation Set continued This Model Number Denotes 3261 3266 Standalone models for Two wire dial operation Two or four wire leased line operation 3262 3267 Rack mount dual modem card models equivalent to 3260 and 3265 respectively for Modular Nest enclosure installation 3263 3268 Rack mount single modem card models equivalent to the 3266 for Modular Nest enclosure installation Documentation Target Audience The documentation set assumes that you are familiar with the basic concepts of data communications that you are an operator only and that you will not be servicing the modem hardware other than making initial cabling connections Note to Programmers and
201. it Error Rate The percentage of bit errors relative to a specific number of bits received usually expressed as a number referenced to a power of 10 A base two numerical representation system using two digits 0 zero and 1 one in the case of a computer Off and On A blend of the two words binary and digit The smallest unit in a byte of information expressed as 0 zero or 1 one A communications protocol or transmission procedure in which control information is encoded in fields of one or more bits Compare with Character Oriented 1 A specified number of transmitted data bits over which an encoding procedure is applied for error control purposes A specified number of data characters or bits 2 Aquantity of transmitted information or data usually determined by its own starting and ending control characters The rate at which data passes over the telephone line in bits per second Glossary 1 esso 5 Glossary Busy out Byte CCITT See ITU Character Character oriented Control characters CRC Crossover cable CTS Data compression synchronous dB dBm DCD DCE Demodulation Digital signal DSR DTE 2 Glossary An indication to a Central Office that a subscriber line is not available to answer incoming calls The availability and implementation of Busy Out varies by country An 8 bit sequence of binary digits bits taken as a single unit by a computer Consultative Co
202. l backup and or disaster recovery at synchronous speeds matching speeds available on the DDS circuit 4 22 Configuring the Modem When used as a restoral device for Telenetics and Motorola 35XX DSU CSUs Figure 4 1 select SDC Option Set 2 in the local and remote SDC Modems This places the modems in external timing as digital services typically provide the network timing To 33 6 kbps SE PSTN e ME 4 l l EE 326XFAST f 56 64 kbps NMS Network Management Channel Figure 4 1 Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral A B Switch Option Set 2 Note the following With SDC Option Set 2 selected for Telenetics Motorola non Telenetics and non Motorola DSU CSUs the DSUs restoral configuration should be set to Timing Internal e In this case the 326X FAST SDC DTE Rate must be set to a constant rate as provided by the network defaults of 56 64 kbps Enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT KSM is set the same in both modems The SDC modem supports single channel environments only For example the SDC modem can restore Port 1 only of the 35XX device The 35XX device when initiating restoral must be set to Normal mode as the 35XX network management channel is virtually a time division multiplexed data stream which cannot be compressed with the S
203. lar V 42 Enabled NRZ Destruct On Off Default None Async Bitsync Sync 1 Option Set 3 Dial V 34 Auto CCITT Country specific 33 6 9600 On Lvl3 On Originate Internal High BER Off On Country specific Off Low Fast Manual Off LL Fail Auto Rel Regular V 42 Enabled NRZ Destruct On Buff or S38 Default None Async Bitsync Sync 1 Option Set 4 2W Lease V 34 Auto CCITT Country specific 33 6 9600 On Lvl3 On Answer Internal High BER Off On Country specific FP Auto Low Fast 1Hr 5min LL Fail Auto Rel Regular V 42 Enabled NRZ Destruct On Off Default None Async Bitsync Sync 1 4 14 Configuring the Modem Table 4 4 Option Set Defaults 326X SDC V 34 Modem Continued Option Set 4 Option Option Set 1 Option Set 2 Option Set 3 326 1 63 66 68 Answer Country specific Country specific Country specific Country specific Async Echo On On On On Char Length 10 10 10 10 V25 Char ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Sync Idle Char Char Char Char V25 Resp V25bis V25bis V25bis V25bis Parity V 25bis V 25bis V 25bis V 25bis AT Msg Before CD Before CD Before CD Before CD Rslt Code Enable Enable Enable Enable ResltForm Verbose Verbose Verbose Verbose Con Msg DTE Rate DTE Rate DTE Rate DTE Rate Rel Msg Off Off Off Off LPDA2 Addr FF FF FF FF LPDA2 ID 326X 326X 326X 326X LPDA2 Det Enable Enable Enable Enable Call Progress 4 4 4 4 TERMINAL OPT S DTE Rate Auto 56 0
204. le fonctionnement du produit ayant suivi une formation dans la technique du traitement de l information et des quipements de bureau par syst me lectrique et connaissant les dangers li s ces quipements Le recours un personnel non qualifi pour cette op ration risque d entrainer des dommages corporels et mat riels ainsi que l invalidit ventuelle du contrat de garantie et de maintenance Nous conseillons aux utilisateurs non qualifi s pour effectuer cette proc dure de contacter Telenetics ou un distributeur agr pour obtenir une liste des services de mise jour disponibles Warnung Kontaktstift berbr ckungen sollten nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal entfernt werden Ein qualifizerter Kundendiensttechniker ist vertraut mit dem Betrieb des Produkts ausgebildet f r die Technologie der mit Strom versorgten Datenverarbeitung und Unternehmensger ten sowie informiert ber die Gefahren die von diesen Ger ten ausgehen k nnen Werden diese Komponenten von unqualifiziertem Personal entfernt kann dies Verletzungen von Personen oder Ger tesch den zur Folge haben und Ihre Garantie und Wartungsvereinbarung gef hrden Anwender die keine Berechtigung zum Durchf hren dieses Vorgangs besitzen sollten Upgradedienste von Telenetics oder einem autorisierten H ndler anfordern Country Specific Information C 45 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Refer also to Figure C 10 which sh
205. leased line Auto Type Auto Type ATK AYO CCITT During answer back tone the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode As soon as answer back tone ends if aV 32 tone has not been detected during ABT the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 22bis modulation mode ATX AY1 Codex During answer back tone the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode After sending answer back tone the modem continues to attempt to negotiate a connection in the V 32 modulation mode If unsuccessful the modem tries to negotiate a connection in the V 22bis modulation mode Blind Dial Blind Dial Determines the time the modem waits before dialing once time has expired the modem dials without waiting for a dial tone ATK BDO The modem waits 2 seconds before dialing AT BD1 ET The modem waits 4 seconds before dialing AT BD2 S6 The modem waits the amount of time specified by S Register 6 before dialing Break Break Handling Controls how the modem handles the break signal in reliable and auto reliable data modes Break signals are sent to the DTE for the duration specified in S Register 97 AT KBKO Destruct The modem uses destructive and expedited break handling It passes the break to the remote site immediately and deletes all data from its buffers NOTE Destructive breaks reinitialize data compression tables for MNP 5 andV 42bis ATKBKI1 Expedited The modem uses nondestructive and expedited
206. long distances or poor transmission facilities Electronic Industries Association The American electronics standards group The most commonly used computer modem interface An electrical standard for interconnecting data communications equipment DCE and data terminal equipment DTE established by EIA The pinout is the same as for EIA 232 C and is nearly equivalent to ITU V 24 End of transmission control character in character oriented protocols applied to BISYNC Tells the receiver that all user data text has been sent End of text control character Tells the receiver that the end of a message has been reached Allows calls to be answered manually and transferred to the modem using an integral exclusion key Switching the data system to a lower transmission speed either for reduced traffic during off peak hours or because of distortion in the telephone system Switching from a lower to a higher data rate Controls data transfer between endpoints in a data network line signals or flow control characters stop and start the flow of data A circuit containing two pairs of wires one pair for each transmission direction A signaling circuit that allows simultaneous 2 way transmission and reception A group of bits transmitted serially over a communications channel The basic data transmission unit used with bit oriented protocols The amount by which an amplifier or power increases the amplitude of a signal passing throu
207. me it completes dialing to the time it detects answer back tone from the remote modem If the modem does not receive answer back tone from the remote modem within the specified time the modem disconnects ATK TTO 30 The modem waits 30 seconds for a call to succeed ATTT1 EAs The modem waits 45 seconds for a call to succeed ATKTT2 60 The modem waits 60 seconds for a call to succeed ATKTT3 90 The modem waits 90 seconds for a call to succeed ATKTT4 180 The modem waits 180 seconds for a call to succeed AT TTS5 S7 The modem waits the amount of time specified by S Register 7 for a call to succeed See Appendix C for your country s options RelMsg This command applies to the Reliable and Auto Reliable data transfer modes only The local modem can send a reliable message to the DTE along with the normal connect message if both modems negotiated a reliable error corrected connection AT XCO Off If enabled the modem sends a connect message to the DTE but it does not send the reliable portion of the connect message A typical connect message is CONNECT 9600 ATK XCl Short The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE when a reliable connection is successful The message indicates the local DTE to modem data rate but no error correction or data compression is included Atypical short reliable connect message is CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE ATK XC2 Long The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE when a connection is successful
208. mmittee on International Telephone and Telegraph International data communications standards group A group of bits used to represent one digit letter or symbol often in 7 or 8 bit groups A communications protocol that carries control information encoded in fields of one or more characters Compare with Bit Oriented In data communications any additional transmitted characters that control or facilitate data transmission between data terminals Cyclic Redundancy Check A BCC error checking mechanism for link level data transmission Special DTE DCE interface cable that reassigns signals from specific pins thus allowing normal data transfer between two DTEs or two DCEs at the same site Clear To Send The signal passed from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is ready to transmit data Usually occurs in response to RequestTo Send RTS See Synchronous Data Compression Decibel A unit used to express relative difference in power between acoustic or electric signals equal to ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the two power levels An increase of 3 dB is equal to doubling the power a decrease of 3 dB is equal to halving the power A measure of power in communications the decibel referenced to one milliwatt into a 600 ohm load 0 dBm 1 milliwatt Data Carrier Detect Also known as the Received Line Signal Detector RLSD This signal is passed from a local modem to a local DTE when an accept
209. modem with common applications including Asynchronous and synchronous answering Asynchronous and synchronous dialing Leased line with dial restoral operation Four sets of options are stored in nonvolatile memory If none is appropriate to an application you can customize an option set and save it in nonvolatile memory Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the Modem for more information on option sets Automatic Calling Interfaces ACUs The modem supports three automatic calling interfaces also known as Auto Call Units ACUs let you execute functions directly from a keyboard AT ACU The asynchronous AT ACU is compatible with the industry standard AT command set AT Commands provide a standard modem communications interface allowing you to configure and operate your modem from a terminal or PC keyboard Using the AT compatible command set AT and AT amp you can for example dial and receive phone calls Telenetics extended AT command set AT amp includes other important parameters used in configuring advanced modem features Refer to Chapter 3 Getting Started and Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface to learn more about theAT ACU andAT command syntax V 25bis ACU For sync or async auto calling use the ITU T V 25bis compliant ACU With either the AT or V 25bis ACU you can store dial or change up to nine phone numbers in the modem s electronic telephone book directly from your terminal
210. n each of these methods Ensuring Optimum Network Performance in SDC Mode The following parameters are critical for ensuring optimum network performance Fast Call AT FC e DTE Rate AT DE Flow AT KFL e TpDlyMin AT FTD Table 4 4 shows 326X SDC option set default settings Carefully note the following when configuring the modem for SDC operation Fast Call Both modems must be configured the same in order to connect If one of the modems does not support Fast Call change the default setting to Off DTE Rate For better link utilization and throughput higher values than the default may be appropriate Refer to the DTE Rate description in Appendix A Refer to Optimizing Network Performance in the preceding section for more information Flow TpDlyMin The default options assume the DTE can accept nondisruptive clock stoppage For DTEs that cannot handle Rx Tx clock stoppage without disrupting data select a different option In this situation Telenetics recommends that the default values not be used SDC Sample Applications SDC Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU SDC Option Set 1 functions the same as described above for non SDC modems Refer to that section for application examples SDC Option Set 2 Sync Dial A B Restoral Single Channel Point to Point Digital Link Restoral via A B Switch When used as a dial backup device for a digital network the SDC modem provides economical dia
211. n the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions three subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 15 minutes After 15 minutes the number is available for dialing Ireland Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed list The delayed list is full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call or e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions three subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls within one hour the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing Country Specific Information C 26 Country Specific Information Netherlands Delayed Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls according to
212. nce notice is not practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your rights to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes to its facilities equipment operations and procedures that can affect the operation of your modem If this happens the telephone company provides you advance notice for making the necessary modifications to your modem to maintain uninterrupted service Also this equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to a party line is subject to state tariffs If you experience problems with this equipment contact Telenetics for repair and or warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved FCC Regulations The Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S A has published regulations that govern the allowable limits of emissions of radio frequency energy for computing devices and associated peripherals These regulations are concerned with interference to radio communications such as radio and television The regulations require equipment for end use in the U S A to be labeled and to be accompanied by the warning which appears on the Notice page at the beginning of this manual There is no guarantee however that interference will
213. nchronous DTE At the beginning of each connection the modem negotiates the highest common data rate with the remote modem The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V 34 V 32bis or V 32 modulation modes This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Configuring the Modem 4 7 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Option Set 4 Async Answering Central Site Without an ACU Models 3260 62 65 67 Option Set 4 satisfies the needs of an asynchronous application where most calls are inbound see Table 4 1 Because calls are received primarily at the central site the modem is set to answer calls automatically With DTR Discon the local DTE can control the DTR signal This allows the local DTE to use DTR transitions to connect the modem to the central site at the beginning of transmission and disconnect it when transmission ends The DTR signal from the DTE must be high for the modem to auto answer If the DTR signal is low it does not answer incoming calls At the beginning of each connection the modem negotiates the highest common data rate with the remote modem The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V 34 V 32bis or V 32 modulation modes This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor Option Set 4 Sync Leased Line Applications With Dial Restoral Models 3261 63 66 68 Option Set 4 uses the modem s leased line restoral feature With this option set the modem operates primarily
214. nd 2 wire dial line modems to include 14 4 and 12 0 kbps It is backwards compatible with the V 32 modulation mode When operating in the V 32 bis modulation mode the modem supports synchronous and asynchronous transmission rates of 4 8 7 2 9 6 12 0 and 14 4 kbps Used with full duplex asynchronous data transmission V 42 is an ITU adopted standard which specifies two methods of error correction for modems MNP 4 and LAPM Link Access Protocol for Modems Used with full duplex asynchronous data transmission V 42 bis is a high performance data compression algorithm based on the Lempel Ziv Data Compression algorithm This compression technique is not compatible with MNP 5 or other MNP levels The theoretical limit of V 42 bis is 4 1 compression The actual compression throughout that is achieved with any algorithm including V 42 bis is data file dependent Using V 42 bis the modem continuously monitors the compressibility of user data If user data is not compressible the V 42 bis algorithm detects this condition and automatically turns data compression off so the data link rate is never less than the modem modulation rate V 34 is a four dimensional trellis coded modulation standard using precoding and pre emphasis equalization schemes A shared connection or boundary between two devices or systems The point logical or physical at which two devices or systems are linked Link Access Protocol for Modems An ITU link layer protocol
215. nd C 7 flow control 4 17 4 19 frames 4 21 France C 7 front end processo r4 16 Front panel 3 2 configuration option sA 2 options defaults 3 5 G Germany C 8 grounding 2 11 Guard time 5 6 H hangu p5 8 HDLC SDLC 4 21 Hong Kong C 8 C 32 host computer 4 16 IBM AS 400 3 10 4 16 4 19 initialization strings C 12 initiate and terminate test s6 10 INITIATING RC message A 41 Installation connecting a telephone to modem C 41 ferrite cylinder 2 7 setting DIP switch A 44 site selection 2 4 Interfaces digital B 2 LEASELINE B 6 PHONE B 7 Ireland C 8 Israel C 8 Italy C 9 ITU recommendation V 35 B 4 ITU V 35 interfac e2 6 ITU TS V 34 modulation 1 6 J jack type C 42 Jack types Canada C 29 United States of America C 38 jacks 2 5 Japan C 9 K k 5 13 Keys front panel 3 5 Keys how to use 3 5 L LAPM A 43 LCD 3 2 LEDs 3 2 Line feed character S Register 4 5 11 line filters 2 7 Link Problem Determination Aid LPDA 2 LPDA 2 3 10 link utilizatio n4 21 liquid crystal display 1 2 Loopback tests 6 10 LPDA2 1 5 M Malaysia C 9 manual answering 5 7 manual dialing using the ATD command 5 7 Menu tree navigating 3 5 Message self test 2 15 messages 2 15 Messages sp ciaux xvi Important xvi Mise en gard exvi MNP A 43 MNP 5 A 43 modem card 2 2 Modular Nest enclosure 1 2 2 7 N NC IN and NC OUT connectors 2 13 NC IN and NC OUT ports 2 5 NC port pinouts B 6 Netherlands C 9 NetVie
216. ndicates that the displayed option is available but is not selected Each parameter has a default option Some defaults are determined by the assigned factory preset option sets preconfigured option sets These defaults are exclusive to an option set Other factory options are not exclusive to an option set and they always have the same default setting regardless of which factory preset option set you use Refer to Appendix A Figure A 1 or to the Reference Card to see the complete menu tree structure including the available and default options Setting Configuration Options from the Front Panel The four control keys Figures 3 2 and 3 3 let you access parameters and options Table 3 2 describes control key functions Table 3 2 Front Panel Keys Keys Function y Steps up through the menu tree from a parameter to a category or from a Return category to the default display Example from Test pressing py displays the TEST OPTS category Pressing py again displays the default display such as DATA 9600 T D gt Steps through the parameters in a menu category Across NOTES 1 If you hold the wor gt key down it repeats until you stop pressing 2 With the 3262 3267 Modems to toggle between modem A and modem B front panels hold py while pressing Getting Started 3 5 paues Dumegp Getting Started Table 3 2 Front Panel Keys Keys Function v Steps through categories example Data 9600
217. ne number to phone book memory in location n Enter Then Dial Lets you dial from the front panel S Reg xxx nnn Lets you set S Register xxx to nnn LPDA 2 Addrznnn Lets you set the LPDA2 address Enter PW nnnn Lets you unlock a modem s password protection Old PW nnnn Lets you enter old password New PW nnnn Lets you configure new password Verify PW nnnn Lets you verify new password Enter Group PW Lets you verify group password NC Address nnn Lets you set network control address New Address nnn Lets you set remote modem s leased line address Rmt Ser nnnnnnn Lets you enter remote modem s serial number The keystrokes to set the numeric entry for these options are as follows 1 Step across the front panel menu by pressing until the option you want to change displays 2 Press You are now ready to key in the numeric entry 3 Press wr until the digit or character you want appears in the leftmost position of the display Example 1xxxxx 96 4 Press p The display shifts one position to the left and the second character GE position is displayed F d 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have completed keying in the numeric entry To S bi re enter a number or character press W to place the cursor at the beginning of the line then re enter the number or character 6 Press to save your selection Configuration Quick Reference A 37 Configuration Quick Reference S Register AT Command Cross Reference Thi
218. nly Y V21 Only d BIEN 12 0 4944 4249429494 44 7200 4800 2400 ad MODULATION OPTS Line Dial 1 23 40 Mod V 94 Auto AF Max Rate 14 4 S 28 8t AF Min Rate 300 A Fast Call Oft A MI Tat 9600 Tas Y o40t N gt I gt I gt Y 264t Yin am MET Saz up 2 34L SDC 7336 2 3 4L SDC ATKAP ADECA IK aax gt ATERT AdaptiveRate On A Mode Originate 1 3 Clock Internal A F Answer 2 4 7 External 2 SDC Y External T Loopback Y Auto Aino I gt D i Ib asm d AT amp G gt PSTN On A Guard Tone Off Off T zen T am I gt ATRE I gt gt Restore Off 1 2 3 4d LioD Low Fast A D to L Manual 1 2 3 4d Hold Dialine Off A F FP only LowSlow Y 15 min WEN Y reng High Fast Y 30 min Y 2min v F Fps Higl Slow F how F 3min Treines 4L Y how Y 4min F FP 108 ACU F 4hour Y 6 min 4L SDC A Y T Fhiti6ACU A Default for All Option Sets Note When you select Modulation Mode D Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets AT MM you must ensure that the Max Rate AT MX and Min Rate 1 4 Default for Option Set n n 1 4 AT MR parameter options are within L Option Set Default for 3261 3263 3266 3268 Modems the valid range for the mode t Availabl Opti see see 1 in Option Sets Option d Option Set Default for 3260 3262 3265 3267 Modems S Default for 326X V 32bis Modem F
219. nnected apparatus such that the aggregate declared voltage drops of all this apparatus together with the voltage drop introduced at 40mA by any separate wiring used to link items of apparatus exceeds 2 0V For statutory purposes apparatus connected to the PSTN via a Relevant Branch System RBS is treated as if connected directly to the PSTN Refer to BS6789 Section 6 1 para 2 4 for the definition of an RBS Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 3 When making calls from other apparatus connected to the PSTN via the series apparatus difficulties may be experienced in Making calls Telephone conversations by both parties If you experience difficulty refer to the modem supplier not the network operator Compliance with BS6789 Section 6 1 1986 Clause 7 3 1 4 This modem causes a voltage drop of 1 7V at a line current of 40mA Country Specific Information C 34 Country Specific Information Compliance with DTI 83 0091 This modem has been approved for use of the following facilities Loop disconnect and multifrequency signaling Storage of telephone numbers for retrieval by a predetermined code Detection of initial proceed indication Operation of the absence of proceed indication Automatic dialing facilities Tone detection i e Ring Tone etc Multiple repeat attempt facility Automatic clearing from call originating end Call progress monitor Series connection Modem
220. ns software is configured for the correct serial port to which your modem is connected i e COMMI COMMA etc Confirm the COM port is configured for the data rate word length and parity your configuration requires Confirm that the cable connecting the modem to the host equipment is a DCE to DTE straight through cable Confirm the electrical interface of your modem V 35 or RS 232 and ensure that you have the correct cable installed Troubleshooting Steps Use the table that follows to match your problem with a diagnosis and solution 6 2 Troubleshooting Guide 326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution During installation Modem won t power up Check AC power Ensure AC outlet is active Check modem s power switch Turn on power switch Modem fails self test Repeat power up sequence If modem fails once again call Telenetics Customer front panel displays Support or your local distributor and report the error error code code Modem doesn t come up Check DIP Switch 6 on Ensure DIP Switch 6 is in the Off up position in ready state 326X modem s rear panel Power cycle the modem Ready on front panel display While operating the 326X as a dial modem ACU CONFIGURATION No response to ACU command Check that TD LED on front f light does not come on check that cables are panel lights when commands are properly connected being sent to the modem
221. o the DTE only when operating as an originate modem S Regxxx S Register ATS nnn Lets you view and set S Registers where xxx equals the S Register to change and nnn equals the value of the register The value must be within the specified range see Chapter 5 for a full description of S Registers Dial Dial Type ATT Tone The modem uses tone dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P modifiers RsltForm Result Code Format ATVO Numeric Result codes are sent to your DTE as numbers short form ATVI Verbose Result codes are sent to your DTE as full words long form Call Progress Call Progress Determines whether the modem waits for call progress signals or blind dials when establishing calls ATXO 0 The modem uses only NO CARRIER and CONNECT result codes ATX1 I The modem uses only NO CARRIER CONNECT and CONNECT lt Rate gt result codes Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 8 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATX2 E The modem waits for dial tone and uses only NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNECT Rate and NO DIALTONE result codes ATX3 9 The modem detects busy signal and uses NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNECT Rate and BUSY result codes ATX4 4 The modem waits for dial tone and detects busy signal Only NO CARRIER CONNECT CONNE
222. o use a value other than the default See the DTE Rate description in Appendix A With Option Set 3 the modem originates calls with its V 25bis ACU DTR is set to 108 1 so that an off to on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the telephone line If the modem detects an incoming call the call is connected If the modem does not detect an incoming call and you have enabled Default Dial ATDA the modem dials the number specified If the Default Dial AT DA is disabled the modem refers to the Mode option AT AC If set to answer the modem goes off hook and sends an answer back tone An on to off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line If DTR is low the modem does not auto answer DTR transitions govern how the modem answers and disconnects calls If you want the V 25bis ACU to manipulate the DTR signal set DTR 108 2 Other options in the ACU OPT S category are set for a typical sync DTE Select SDC Option Set 3 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT KSM is set the same in both modems The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 Auto modulation mode This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor To 56 64 kbps POPE d __ 326XFAST 326XFAST SCH Eat SDC _ SDC JJ NMS DTE Host Network Management Channel Figure 4 3 326X SDC Dial Only Application Option Set 3 Configuring the Modem 4 25 w poN o
223. odem displays SELECT OPTIONS n Using the ATZ Command 1 Read Preparing for Operation earlier in this chapter 2 Identify the option set for your application The default is Option Set 1 3 Type ATZn CR where n 1 4 NOTE The modem disconnects from the line when the ATZ command is entered and any test in progress is immediately terminated Since anyAT command following the ATZ command is ignored by the modem make sure ATZ is the last command entered in the command string To create a customized option set Using the AT amp W Command 1 Using the ATZn command select an option set n that most closely suits the application 2 Use AT commands see Appendix A to change parameter options For example to change RTS CTS delay from its time in S Register 26 to 15 ms enter AT ZS DL1 CR The front panel displays OK 3 Enter AT amp Wn where n specifies the address option set where the new customized option set is stored The front panel displays SAVING OPTIONS 4 After a few seconds your modifications are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory and the modem front panel displays SAVE COMPLETED 5 Do not turn off modem power until SAVE COMPLETED appears 4 10 Configuring the Modem From the Modem s Front Panel 1 Identify the option set that most closely suits the application The default is 1 2 Display the option s you want to modify using wp and p Fo rexample to change Max Rate from 2400 to 72
224. ommodated by the remote modem V 42bis or MNP 5 is used Otherwise no data compression is used Dial Wait Dial Wait AT gt K DDO 2 sae The modem waits 2 seconds for a dial tone AT KDDI 3 sec The modem waits 3 seconds for a dial tone AT zk DD 4 sec The modem waits 4 seconds for a dial tone AT KEDD3 6 sec The modem waits 6 seconds for a dial tone AT DD4 12 sec The modem waits 12 seconds for a dial tone AT Dis 15 sec The modem waits15 seconds for a dial tone AT gt K DD6 20 sec The modem waits 20 seconds for a dial tone AT KEDD7 30 sec The modem waits 30 seconds for a dial tone AT ze DD 40 sec The modem waits 40 seconds for a dial tone AT zk DD9 S7 Dial wait is determined by setting S Register 7 See the S Registers section in Chapter 5 DTE Rate DTE Rate AT zs DE2 300 The DTE port is configured for 300 bps AT ZS DEA 1200 The DTE port is configured for 1200 bps AT K DES 2400 The DTE port is configured for 2400 bps this is the lowest rate available in SDC mode ATK De 4800 The DTE port is configured for 4800 bps AT K DEI 7200 The DTE port is configured for 7200 bps ATK DES 9600 The DTE port is configured for 9600 bps AT zs DE9 12 0 The DTE port is configured for 12 000 bps AT DE10 14 4 The DTE port is configured for 14 400 bps AT DE11 16 8 The DTE port is configured for 16 800 bps ATK DEI2 19 2 The DTE port is configured for 19 200 bps ATK DEI 21 6 The DTE port is configured for 21 600 bps AT ZS DE1
225. on a leased line unless that line fails If so the modem automatically restores the connection over a single dial line You must install a 326X Series Modem at both ends of the leased line to implement restoral operation Option Set 4 configures the modem for a general restoral application see Table 4 1 The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV 34 orV 32bis Auto modes This ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates Ifrestoral criteria are met the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the public switched telephone network PSTN over a single dial line At that time the modem attempts to run at its maximum rate over the dial line and falls back to lower speeds if required After an hour the modem returns to the leased line If you operate your modems in leased line mode with Option Set 4 and one modem has software Revision 7 8 or 7 9 set the Fast Call parameter AT K FC Modulation Opts Menu to Off in both modems Option Set Descriptions 326XFAST SDC Modems Option Set 1 Async Calls to Central Site Option Set 1 in the 326X SDC product functions the same as Option Set 1 above Option Set 2 Sync Dial A B Restoral Option Set 2 satisfies the needs of a synchronous point to point digital link restoral application see Table 4 2 With this option set the Clock is set to External as network timing is provided by the DSU CSU NOTE With this option set for Telenetics and Motorola DSU CSUs as well
226. onous applications IBM AS 400 for synchronous dialing External Auto Call Units such as the Bell 801C These methods are described in the sections that follow V 25bis ACU for Sync or Async Applications The modem supports an ITU TS V 25bis ACU for initiating calls from an intelligent terminal in synchronous or asynchronous formats which supports Addressed mode to perform call related tasks such as storing phone numbers in memory dialing calls from memory connecting disregarding incoming calls Manual and direct call establishment methods Direct mode lets you use DTR transitions from the DTE to establish calls Manual mode lets you manually initiate and answer calls with a telephone and then transfer the call to the modem Where Do I Go from Here For more information on the V 25bis ACU refer to Chapter 3 Automatic Calling Interfaces in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide Programmers and System Developers should also refer to Chapter 3 for a programming guide describing asynchronous and synchronous data formats using the ASCII EBCDIC character sets NetView LPDA 2 ACU for Sync Applications The modem supports Link Problem Determination Aid LPDA 2 LPDA 2 is the communications protocol between IBM host software and transmission devices for exchanging diagnostic and control information LPDA 2 commands provide a means for an attached terminal to command the modem to dial a telephone number and report b
227. ons should be made by a qualified electrician If already installed the connections should be inspected by the appropriate electrical inspection authority To prevent circuit overload each piece of equipment is assigned a Load Number LN which denotes the percentage of the total load used by the device in a telephone loop This equipment has a load number of 4 You may use any combination of devices on a loop subject only to the requirement that the total of the load numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The standard connecting arrangement codes for the equipment are as follows CA02B CA11A CA40A CA41A and CA45A Canadian Emissions Statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mteri l brouilleur du Canada Country Specific Information C 29 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Rear Panel Pinouts This section provides the rear panel pinouts for the 3265 3266 Modem cross referenced to the pinouts for the telco jacks supported in Canada 3265 Modem Table C 12 describes dial line connector pinouts for RJ jack types Table C 12 DIAL LINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation Telco Jack Selection Dial Line Dial Line Connector Jack RJ45S RJ11C Leased Pin No Function RJ4MB CA45A RJ16C CA11A Line 1 MB X Not Use
228. oopback timing timing signals are passed on EJA TIA 232 D Pin 17 V 24 circuit 115 NOTE This selection is not available in SDC mode If you select loopback with SDC mode enabled the modem uses internal timing instead Power Up In Power Up In Option Set AT amp YO Old When you turn on the modem it automatically uses the last saved option set AT amp Y1 l When you turn on the modem it automatically uses Option Set 1 AT amp Y2 2 When you turn on the modem it automatically uses Option Set 2 AT amp Y3 3 When you turn on the modem it automatically uses Option Set 3 AT amp Y4 4 When you turn on the modem it automatically uses Option Set 4 Enter Phone Enter Telephone Numbers where n 1 9 AT amp Zn 1 9 Lets you store up to nine telephone numbers in the modem s address book of up to 50 characters each To enter a number into the address book enter the AT amp Z or ATK CN command the telephone book address 1 9 a comma and the telephone number to store For example to store the number 1 222 555 444 in memory location 3 enter AT CN3 12225554444 CR If you enter AT amp Z or AT KCN without specifying a memory location the modem stores the number in address 1 If no telephone number follows AT amp Z or AT CN the specified memory location s telephone number is deleted NOTE When dialing telephone numbers you can include dial modifiers to instruct the modem how and when to dial a call Refer to Table A 4 Answer Answer
229. opulated with 3267 and 3268 V 34 Modems A cylinder is included with each cable that requires one Follow the instructions below to ensure correct cylinder installation Installing the Modem 2 7 w poN eui PBumeisu Installing the Modem Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on an Audio or Network Management Cable Do the following for each cable 1 Snugly wrap the cable twice completely around the cylinder Figure 2 5 2 Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts 3 Ensure that 1 to 1 1 2 inches of the cable protrude from the cylinder on the end you insert into the backplane connector 4 Snap the cylinder closed You can reopen and close it to reset the cable 5 Insert the cable into the modem backplane connector with the ferrite cylinder close to the backplane connector To Connector On Modem Rear Panel Ferrite Cylinder Cable Looped Twice Around Cylinder 7 7 u 1 115 Figure 2 5 Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on an Audio Cable Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a DTE Cable Do the following for each DTE cable 1 Pass the DTE cable through the cylinder 2 Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts 3 Position the cylinder as close as possible to the plug you install on the back plane connector 4 Snap the cylinder closed You can reopen and close it to reset the cable 5 Insert the cable into the DTE connector on the modem backplane connector with the ferrite cylinder close to the
230. or 1 minute while testing the leased line AT HD2 2min ATK HD3 3min AT ZS HD4 4min AT Ze HDS5 5min DTE Ct 141 DTE Circuit 141 Controls whether the local DTE can send the modem into a local analog loopback by sending a signal on V 24 Circuit 141 Pin 18 to the modem The DTE must support Circuit 141 in order to use this option AT KLAO Off The modem does not respond to a signal on Circuit 141 Pin 18 ATKLAI On An off to on transition on Circuit 141 Pin 18 causes the modem to initiate a local analog loopback test An on to off transition nV 24 Circuit 141 Pin 18 takes the modem out of a local analog loopback test Line Compen Line Compensation Enables the modem to compensate for the effects of low loss in the End Office to End Office connections AT KLCO Off Disables the Line Compensation option AT LC1 On Enables the Line Compensation option DTE Ct 140 DTE Circuit 140 Controls whether the local DTE can put the modem into a remote digital loopback by sending a signal on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 to the modem AT LDO Off The modem does not respond to a signal on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 AT KLDI On An off to on transition mV 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 sends the modem into a remote digital loopback test An on to off transition on V 24 Circuit 140 Pin 21 takes the modem out of a remote digital loopback test DtoL Dial to Leased Option Automatic Disconnect Lets the modem automatically disconnect from the dial line and
231. ork timing Clock Internal To specify a non default rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE use the DTE Rate AT KDE See the DTE Rate description in Appendix A Select SDC Option Set 4 in both the local and remote modems and ensure that Mode AT ZzgM is set the same in both modems If operating with the Telenetics or Motorola 65007 5 that has the Link Back Up option set DTR 108 2 the default is 108 1 for 6500s without the Link Back Up option A C t DSIN rF j la To 56 64 kbps Bridge Router NMS Network Management Channel Figure 4 5 Point to Point Leased Line Application with Dial Restoral Option Set 4 Configuring the Modem 4 27 w poN eui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Remote Access Reset Remote access reset enables someone unfamiliar with the AT command set to quickly configure a local modem so that another modem can dial into it Then you can use the remote modem to configure local modem options Remote access reset configures the modem to Answer an incoming call Accept a network management session Accept a remote configuration session initiated by the calling modem Disconnect a call if one is in progress End any test in progress Operation To select remote access reset press W and J simultaneously for three seconds Rmt Access Reset displays The modem rese
232. orkaround to an inability of Rockwell based modems to establish a connection Telenetics recommends that with Rockwell based modems you set S 99 to 120 5 18 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Guide Contents ie e MON ccc 6 2 lico vii M 6 2 326X Series Modem Diagnostic Tests 1 seien ette veia 6 10 Synchronous Data Compression SDC Testing eese 6 11 Troubleshooting Guide 6 1 Bunoouse qnoujj Troubleshooting Introduction Most problems encountered when installing and using the modem can be corrected if you carefully read and follow the instructions in the documentation Use the Troubleshooting section of this chapter to analyze and correct problems before calling Telenetics Customer Support Center or your local distributor The section after the troubleshooting guide tells you how to initiate and terminate tests Chapter 4 of the326X Series Modem Reference Guide contains detailed information on these tests Assumptions The modem is set to factory default configurations The modem has been installed with all initial cabling complete Troubleshooting This section discusses Dial operation problems Synchronous data compression SDC mode problems Leased line operation problems The First Step First confirm that your data communications application is set up correctly Confirm that your communicatio
233. ory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 0 Range 0 to 255 seconds This S Register determines the duration in seconds of loopback tests With S Register 18 set to 0 the timer is not operational and tests must be terminated manually NOTE S Register 18 s function is valid only when loopback tests are issued using the AT amp T command S Register 18 cannot be used to automatically terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel 5 14 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface S Register 25 Delay Before Looking for DTR Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default 5 Range 0 to 255 seconds When DTR Delay S25 ATK DT and AT Form Sync Data AT amp M or V25 Form AsynSync the modem goes into synchronous data mode after the modem dials asynchronously S Register 25 lets you switch from an asynchronous DTE to a synchronous DTE without hanging up S Register 25 allows this switch by specifying how many seconds the modem waits after connecting before looking for DTR S Register 26 RTS CTS Delay Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default 1 Range 0 to 255 This S Register selects the delay between CTS and RTS while the modem is online It operates in modes specified by the RTS AT KRS and CTS AT KCT commands The time is selectable in 1 100 second intervals from 0 to 2 55 seconds S Register 30 DTE Inactivity Disconnect Stored in Nonvolatile Memor
234. otocol is used NOTE This option does not apply when the modem is configured for SDC operation If both the local and remote modems are operating in SDC mode LAPM error correction with V 42bis data compression only is used no other setting is available AT zk ECO V 42 The modems negotiate the use of LAPM or MNP error correction First the modems attempt to negotiate using LAPM If unsuccessful they attempt to negotiate using MNP AT KECI LAPM The modems attempt to negotiate LAPM error correction AT KEC2 MNP The modems attempt to negotiate MNP error correction Fast Call Fast Call Reduces the time for selected phases of the connect sequence AT FCO Off This option disables the Fast Call feature AT KFC1 Lvll The 2 15 second billing delay in the answer modem is eliminated The length of time ABT is sent is reduced by 1 second in all modulation modes except V 34 Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 19 92uaJ9Jeu Joinb uoneanBiuo2 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Command Parameter amp Option Description AT FC2 AT FC3 Lv12 Lv13 Lv12 applies to V 32 coded or uncoded V 32bis modulation modes only It includes the Lvl1 function and shortens training time by approximately 2 seconds Lv13 includes the Lvl1 and Lv12 function and elim
235. ountry Specific Information Contents Continued Installation of Telephone Socket Application for Installation of Telephone Socket LE cT PCC Registration 1 2 eriperet tiic FCG Regulations 2i ree Gra pie epo pas Dial Line Jack Types 1 Bear Panel E Dial and Leased Line Transmit Levels Making Telephone to Modem Connections Teles Option CALC aiio rotten Declaring The Tack Type oo eseu cr Using the Modular Nest Backplane s Busy Out Feature C 2 Country Specific Information Introduction This appendix provides information for operating the modem by country including Restricted features summary describing modem features that are restricted or limited by regulatory agencies in some countries Installation Notes containing information useful when installing the modem in countries other than the U S A and Canada Modem standalone rear panel views and the countries supporting each view Modem rear panel interface pinouts Cables shipped to each country along with pinouts Delayed Forbidden list operation in each country Country specific information that applies only to Canada Denmark Hong Kong the United Kingdom and the U S A Use the Universal International section if your country is not one of the following Australia France Japan Spain Belgium Germany Malaysia Sweden Canada Hong Kong Netherlands Switzerland Czech R
236. ow control is not applicable in 326X SDC mode If SDC is enabled and you select XON XOFF PT the modem operates as if flow control were disabled Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 20 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT KFLS TxClk Transmit Clock This option applies only in SDC mode When the Tx Clk flow control option is selected the modem uses a transmit clock for flow control based on available buffer space The transmit clock is stopped when the buffers are full inhibiting the flow of data from the DTE It is started again when buffer space is available NOTE This option is operational only when internal timing has been selected Clock Internal AT amp X Hold DL Line Hold Dial Line This command forces the modem to hold a dial restoral connection while testing a leased line connection This command applies to modems configured for restoral ATK HDO Off The Hold Dialine option is disabled a dial modem configured for restoral disconnects from the dial line normally A leased line modem configured for restoral disconnects from the dial line as soon as it connects to the leased line AT HD1 min A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 1 minute A leased line modem configured for restoral holds the dial line f
237. owable capacitances The maximum capacitance is a total of the inter conductor capacitance between the conductors represented as Cc in Table B 4 and the capacitance between the shield and the conductor represented as Cs in Table B 4 Table B 4 Maximum Cable Capacitance per Data Rate Data Rate Maximum Cable Capacitance Cc Cs in kbps Pico Farads pF 0 20 0 2400 pF 20 0 64 0 900 pF 64 0 96 0 400 pF 115 2 200 pF Notes 1 The total capacitance in this column is the total allowable cable capacitance 2 Maximum resistance of cable conductors is 25 Ohms The maximum allowable cable capacitance decreases as DTE rates increase The more capacitance in the cable the shorter the allowable length at a DTE rate Similarly the allowable lengths become shorter as DTE rates increase Since newer PCs support EIA 232 D type receivers drivers at higher rates you must use information in this section to determine cable length To determine the per foot capacitance of your cable 1 Determine the length of the cable you require for your application 2 Determine the range of rates that the modem will use For example to routinely operate the modem s DTE port between 20 0 and 96 0 kbps determine the cable capacitance for the higher rate You can operate the modem up to but not exceeding the maximum rate capacitance that you calculate 3 Refer to Table B 4 for the maximum allowable cable capacitance for
238. ows pin locations on Modular Nest 21 back planes Modular Nest 9s have a similar layout Jumpers on Left Pin Pairs Modular Nest 21 Enclosure Rear View GO gg gg gg 20 Go 209 gg gg gg Op EB gg gg gg 20 Go 209 gg oo gg gg EB gg gg gg Go Go 209 gg oo gg gg SE Figure C 10 Modular Nest Backplane Pin Locations Modular Nest 21 Shown In Hong Kong and the United Kingdom Busy Out backplanes are hard wired for Busy Out operation These backplanes do not use pin jumpers C 46 Country Specific Information Glossary This glossary defines terms used in data communications and in the 326X Series Modem documentation set ACU Analog signal ASCII Asynchronous Auto answer Baud Baudot code Baud rate BCC BER Binary Bit Bit oriented Block error bps Automatic Calling Unit or Auto Call Unit Internal or external to the DCE the ACU is a command set interface between the attached DTE an
239. p G2 in 3266 8 AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 33 AT amp P1 Always 40 AT amp PO Always 33 AT amp P1 Pulse Cycle AT E AA Manual AT KAAO Manual AT AAO Manual ATK AAO Answer Ring 2 ATK AA2_ Ring 1 AT KAA 1 Ring 1 AT AAI Ring 2 ATK AA2 Ring 2 ATK AA AT BD Always 4 sec Always 4 sec Restricted Blind Dial ATKBD1 AT BDI1 AT CD 7 sec AT KCD2 Loss Dis 3 sec AT CD1 AT DD Always 6 sec 6 sec AT KDD3 Always 20 sec 2 sec AT ze DDO Dial Wait ATK Di 4 sec AT KDD2 ATK DD6 4 sec ATK DD2 3 sec ATXDD1 6 sec AT Ze DD3 S7 AT zk DD9 AT DP Always 4 sec Pause Delay AT ZS DR Off AT DRO Off AT KDRO Off ATK DRO Auto Redial 1 AT DRI1 1 ATSKDRI 1 AT DRI 2 ATXDR2 2 AT kKDR2 2 AT DR2 3 AT DR3 is 3 AT ZS DR3 8 AT ZS DRS AT ELL Restricted in 3265 6 Restricted Restricted in 3268 LAL Busy Out ATKLN Restricted in 3265 6 Restricted Restricted in 3268 DTE Pin 25 ATK TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Length ATK TLO ATK TLO AT TLO AT TT 30 sec ATXTTO 30 sec AT KTTO 30 sec AT TTO 30 sec AT TTO Call Timeout 60 sec AT KTT2 60sec AT TT2 60sec AT KTT2 45 sec ATKTT1 DL TX Level Always 10dBm Always 9dBm Always 6dBm Not supported Select dial line transmit level using Telco option TELCO OPTS menu LL TX Level Always 13dBm Always 9dBm Always 6dBm Set to OdBm adjustable from 0 to 15 dBm C 6 Country Specific Information Czech Republic and
240. played Off when modem B front panel information is displayed To toggle between modem A and modem B front panels hold W and then press ALM Alarm Enclosure cards only On when a test is in progress or a modem failure occurs With the 3262 3267 Modem card if one modem fails the ALM LED lights and remains lit regardless of which modem front panel is being viewed Front Panel Display The front panel has a 16 character alphanumeric LCD display see Figure 3 2 or 3 3 You access the configuration menu tree through this display to Configure the modem Store and view telephone numbers nitiate and answer calls View status information Run online tests Enter passwords and network addresses Navigating the Configuration Menu Tree This section describes the modem menu tree structure It explains how to access parameters using the front panel control keys Menu Structure The menu structure consists of fifteen categories which appear in capital letters Example CONFIGURATION OPT S Each category has parameters example Mode Some parameters are configurable others indicate modem and call status Most parameters have selectable options Options affect the modem s operating characteristics You can view parameters and options in the front panel LCD display If options can be set the following indicators display An equals sign indicates the currently selected option of the parameter A colon i
241. provide more than one number to call in case one is busy If a call fails and the number is linked the modem pauses and then calls the linked number NOTE With this feature enabled the modem dials linked numbers before redialing To link numbers using the AT Command enter AT LN followed by the memory location of the number you want to link from n a comma and the memory location of the number to link m For example AT ELN2 4 In this example memory location 2 is linked to memory location 4 T oclear the link between the two memory locations enter AT ZE LN2 Effectively memory location 2 is now linked to no memory location Low Speed Low Speed Determines which low speed modulation mode is used when a higher V 34 V 32bis V 32 or V 22bis modulation mode connection cannot be made while Mod V 34 Auto V32bis Auto or Auto V32 AT KLSO Bell Bell 103 modulation mode is used ATKLS1 CCITT V 21 modulation mode is used DTE Pin 25 DTE Pin 25 Controls whether the modem uses EIA TIA 232 D Pin 25 as an input or an output Set rear panel Switch 2 to match this setting see Table A 6 for details on rear panel switches AT KLTO Busy The DTE signals the modem on Pin 25 to make the modem appear busy to incoming calls Set rear panel DIP switch 2 to the off up position Also setAT amp J Telco to RJ4MB NOTE In modems in the U S A and Canada the Make Busy function operates only in nest card modems Make Busy settings display in standalone mo
242. ptions See Appendix C for your country s options A 10 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT amp I3 Modem ID 1 Product code AT amp I4 Modem ID 1 Network control address optional AT amp I5 Modem ID 1 Device serial number Telco Dial Line Jack Type AT amp JO RJ11C This 6 pin modular jack type is the most common permissive data mode voice jack AT amp J1 arrangement found in the home or office and operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service AT amp J2 RJ45S This 8 pin modular jack type is the most common programmable jack arrangement and permits the use of an exclusion key telephone This jack also operates on a single line bridged tip and ring voice or low speed data application service NOTE When installing the modem in a PBX environment the interface to the PBX should be a voice grade jack RJ11 Although an RJ11 jack is installed Telenetics recommends that Telco RJ45S This optimizes modem performance the when operating at high data rates over a PBX In a normal Telco supplied loop situation the telco options setting should match the jack type installed AT amp J3 RJ16CS This 6 pin modular jack type is a special permissive data mode jack arrangement that allows use of an exclusion key telephone AT amp J4 RJ4MB This 8 pin modular progr
243. r application Check the documentation included with your communications software package to determine whether you need to useAT commands directly Using AT Commands AT commands are accepted by the modem in command mode or escape mode The modem is in command mode when it is disconnected from the telephone line You can enter escape mode and issue AT commands during a connection the escape sequence is described later in this chapter Entering AT Command Lines To enter a single AT command line 1 Enter the prefix AT The characters AT upper case or lower case but not mixed must begin the command line 2 Enter an AT command For example D instructs the modem to dial a call H instructs the modem to hang up A numeric character for example 2 following an AT command instructs the modem to use a specific command option If a numeric character is not indicated the modem assumes the 0 zero option 3 End with a carriage return CR The exceptions to the aboveAT command line conventions are A repeat last command and the escape sequence Responses result codes to AT commands always appear in upper case Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 3 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU To enter multiple AT commands on a single command line Multiple AT commands can be entered on a command line using a single AT prefix The modem accepts up to 60 characters after the prefix Spaces a
244. r corrected link In Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode If the modem negotiates a connection in the V 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode it terminates the call In Reliable data mode leased line operation the modem initiates a retrain if the error correction function does not establish a reliable link within 30 seconds Once the local modem connects with the remote modem it attempts to establish an error corrected link In Auto Reliable data mode the modem uses speed conversion if enabled This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds The modem reverts to Normal mode if it cannot establish an error corrected link In SDC mode with the Auto Rel option the modem reverts to Direct mode if it cannot establish an error corrected link Enable terminal flow control when operating in the Auto Reliable mode If the local modem negotiates a connection in theV 21 or Bell 103 modulation mode Normal mode is used in asynchronous applications Direct mode is used in synchronous applications Speed Dependent Auto Reliable Once the local modem connects with the remote modem it attempts to establish an error corrected link If a connection is established at 1200 bps or less Normal mode is used in async applications Direct mode is used in sync applications In data mode the Speed Dependent Auto Reliable mode uses speed conversion if en
245. r to expect a callback and to enter the access security password AT Ze ZPO None No tones are generated by the answer modem AT KZP1 Prompt Only Upon answering a call the local modem sends the caller a dial tone Thisis a prompt for the caller to enter the access security password This setting is intended for manual dialing only The dial tone lasts for the amount of time specified by S Register 45 The caller must enter the access security password in the amount of time specified by S Register 46 Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 32 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT KZP2 Ack Only After validating the password the modem generates an acknowledgment tone before hanging up This indicates to the caller that the access security password is valid and that the modem should expect to receive a callback Upon hearing the tone the caller should hang up immediately This setting is intended for callback only AT ZP3 Prompt Ack Upon answering a call the local modem generates both the prompt and acknowledgment tone at the appropriate times This setting is intended for manual dialing only NOTE For a detailed description of how the modem s access security and call features operate refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide
246. rangement supports Make Busy operation Using this jack type you can make the modem appear to be off hook to the central telephone office NOTE Jack type is defined to the modem using the Telco option in the TELCO OPT S menu For details refer to Declaring The Jack Type section later in this appendix C 38 Country Specific Information Rear Panel Pinouts This section provides modem rear panel pinouts cross referenced to the pinouts for the telco jacks supported in the U S A 3260 Modem Table C 16 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts for RJ jack types X indicates the signal is active Table C 16 DIALLINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation DIAL Line TELCO Jack Selection DIAL LINE Jack Leased Connector Pin No Function RJ4MB HJ45S RJ16C RJ11C Line 1 MB X Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 2 MBI X Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 3 MI x X X Not Used Not Used 4 Ring X X X X X 5 Tip X X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used Not Used 7 PR X X Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 PC X X Not Used Not Used Not Used Table C 17 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types X indicates the signal is active Table C 17 PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation PHONE Connector PHONE Jack TELCO Jack Selection Pin No Function RJ4MB HJ45S RJ16C RJ11C 1 N C N C N C N C N C 2 N C N C N C N C N C 3 MI X X X Not Used 4 Ring X X X X 5 Tip X X X X 6 MIC X X X Not Used 7 N C N C N C N C N
247. raph and Telephone Government authority in many European companies that typically operates the public telecommunications network sets standards and policies and negotiates communications issues internationally for a particular country Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A type of modulation that varies both the phase and amplitude of an analog wave See EIA TIA 232 D Request To Send The signal from a terminal to its co located modem that prepares the modem for data transmission See Synchronous Data Compression Synchronous data link control bit oriented protocol developed by IBM A data bit used in asynchronous transmission to signal the beginning of a character A data bit used in asynchronous transmission to signal the end of a character Start of text control character Designates the start of a message s text as well as usually the end of the message heading Glossary 5 esso 5 Glossary SYN Synchronous Synchronous Data compression SDC Tail circuit Training Transmission rate Two wire V 22bis V 24 V 25bis V 32 V 32bis V 34 V 42 V 42bis 6 Glossary Sync character Establishes synchronism and fills time in the absence of any data or control character to maintain synchronism Data accepted or provided with an accompanying time signal An algorithm that allows the modem to run at a DTE rate higher than the DCE rate This is accomplished by receiving frames of data at the originating
248. ration if you select Auto the DTE will be driven at the previous DTE rate selected the factory default is 9600 bps Data Form Data Format Lets you specify the data encoding format to be used during SDC connections NOTE This option applies only to SDC data mode It does not apply to synchronous ACUs V 25bis or LPDA2 while disconnected In the online mode LPDA2 commands must follow the format of this option AT K DFO NRZ The modem uses the NRZ data encoding format ATX DFI1 NRZI The modem uses the NRZI data encoding format LtoD Leased to Dial In an automatic restoral application the originating modem uses the setting of this command as a trigger for automatic restoral You select a threshold for the number of retrains to occur over a period of time The originating modem initiates restoral if the number is exceeded AT DIO Low Fast This is the most sensitive setting It lets the modem initiate restoral when signal quality deteriorates slightly For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded V 32bis modulation modes 3 retrains must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established For other modulation modes 6 retrains must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established AT zk DII Low Slow For V 34 V 32 V 32 Uncoded V 32bis modulation modes 6 retrains must occur within 10 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established For all other modulation modes 12 retrains must occur within 10 minutes before
249. rd protect a modem from access by other users This prevents unauthorized changes from being made to a configuration Front panel security does not prevent you from using the modem You can also screen incoming calls so that unauthorized users cannot access a modem This is accomplished with password and callback functions Appendix A explains how to configure security features Status Snapshots 1 8 About the Modem The modem s status snapshot feature lets you view a local or remotely controlled modem s EIA signals and Telenetics circuit quality monitoring system CQMS parameters and view a configuration summary CQMS parameters continuously estimate major line parameters without disrupting data traffic Measurement of such selections as signal to noise ratio and receive level helps you to isolate causes of degraded network performance Adaptive Rate System With the Adaptive Rate System enabled the 326X Series Modem continuously optimizes its transmit speed within the V 34 V 32bis V 32 coded and uncoded and V 22bis modulation modes By constantly monitoring signal quality the modem adapts to the optimum transmission rate allowed by line conditions ensuring maximum throughput and efficiency Troubleshooting V 54 andV 22bis Tests The modem supports a full range of ITU TS V 54 and V 22bis compatible tests to help isolate and correct problems Refer to Chapter 6 for typical problems and ways to correct them Chapter
250. re not counted in the length AT commands are interpreted in sequence in the command line until one of the following occurs A CR is encountered An invalid command is encountered A command is encountered which causes the modem to reset go off hook or enter a test state For example you might enter ATEOV1 amp W lt CR gt on a single command line This command disables Asynchronous Echo It configures the Result Code Format to Verbose and the Save Changes feature to Option Set 1 These options and settings are described fully in Appendix A Commands that are followed by a telephone number must be at the end of the line However if the semicolon dial modifier follows a telephone number the modem returns to command mode after dialing Therefore AT commands can be entered after a semicolon in a command string NOTE If an error occurs AT commands prior to the error are executed commands following the error are ignored If you enter an AT command that requires a postscript number and no number is entered the modem defaults to a 0 setting AT Command String Examples Table 5 1 provides AT command string examples and their ACU results Table 5 1 Interpreting AT Command Strings Command Interpretation AT amp X lt CR gt Postscript number needed and none is provided 0 is assumed Transmitter timing is set for internal ATS2 No response Needs a carriage return after the command GATEO CR Ignores eve
251. re sent at the last autobauded DTE speed and parity CONNECT result codes are also sent at the last autobauded DTE speed even if the call is established at a different speed When the modem is turned on the last autobauded speed is saved Because parity is saved within option sets the parity value that is saved in the power up option set is the one that is active The Escape Sequence The escape sequence is used when the modem is online and you need to enter commands to the modem without disconnecting The escape sequence with guard time protects against losing the connection while you send commands NOTE Autobaud does not operate when the modem is in escape mode Once in command state you can e Terminate a call e Initiate and terminate a test e Issue AT action commands Change your modem s configuration nitiate a remote configuration session Read modem status using the AT ST command Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 5 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU The escape state is entered by sending the escape character three consecutive times The escape character is selectable as any ASCII character Its value is stored in S Register 2 and the default is decimal 43 To disable escape command detection set S Register 2 to a value greater than 127 A guard time is used with the escape sequence A guard time must precede and follow the sequence of escape characters to prevent the characte
252. red telephone numbers from memory Reinitializing Memory from the Front Panel 1 Press W twice Press until the modem displays Reinit Memory 2 Press The modem displays Reinit Mem 3 Press to reinitialize modem memory Reinitializing Memory Using the AT amp F Command You can also reinitialize memory by entering AT amp F lt CR gt from the terminal Configuring the Modem 4 5 Wedpo oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Configuration Option Sets This section discusses the modem s preconfigured option sets in three parts What is an Option Set How to Configure an Option Set Option Set Defaults 326X V 32bis 326X FAST V 34 and 326XFAST SDC What is an Option Set Option sets are complete configurations each tailored for an application and stored in memory Option sets get the modem working quickly If an option set does not exactly suit your needs pick the one that most closely matches your application modify its settings and save the changes in the modem s nonvolatile memory refer to Appendix A Table 4 1 shows V 3bis and V 34 option sets Table 4 2 shows SDC option sets Table 4 1 Option Set Summary 326X V 32bis and V 34 Modems Option Application Set Async dial applications in which you are using the AT ACU to originate callsto 1 a central site default option set Sync central site auto answer applications no ACU 2 Sync calls to a central site 3 Async c
253. return to the leased line after a specified period AT KLEO Manual Pressing the Talk Data key at the Home position returns the modem to the leased line Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 21 90UdJ9J9Y YIINHO uoneanBiyuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATKLEI1 15 min The modem returns to the leased line after 15 minutes ATKLE2 30 min The modem returns to the leased line after 30 minutes ATKLE3 Hr The modem returns to the leased line after 1 hour AT LE4 2Hr The modem returns to the leased line after 2 hours AT KLES 4 Hr The modem returns to the leased line after 4 hours LAL Busy Out Local Analog Loopback Test Busy Out Determines whether the modem appears busy to incoming calls during a local analog loopback test NOTE Set AT amp J TELCO OPT S Telco to RJ4MB before enabling this option AT LLO Off The modem does not busy out the line during a local analog loopback test allowing incoming calls to ring AT LLI On The modem connects to the line during a local analog loopback test making the line appear busy to incoming calls AT gt KLNm n Link Phone s Link Telephone Numbers m to fin Lets you link telephone numbers stored in the modem s telephone book Some remote locations
254. ristics frame size window size and DTE rate selected Refer to Chapter 1 of the326X Series Modem Reference Guide for a description of how to use the RX TX Throughput and Link Utilization displays Telenetics recommends the following to maximize efficiency If your application is operating in a windowed protocol environment set the window sizes to greater than 1 to improve performance Recall that windowing refers to the number of packets sent before an acknowledgment is required To improve network performance adjust frame sizes The optimum frame size for most applications is between 128 and 1024 bytes Experiment with window and frame sizes for maximum performance If link utilization is low raise the DTE rate Low link utilization typically implies that the DTE equipment is the bottleneck in data transmission Configuring the Modem 4 21 w poN oui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Configuring the Modem for SDC Operation You can configure the 326XFAST SDC Modem for SDC in one of these ways Select Option Set 2 3 or 4Leased discussed below Configure the modem as follows Select one of the reliable data transfer modes Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable Choose an Auto Call Unit ACU AT V 25bis LPDA or None using the ACU Select option ACU OPT S category Select a bit synchronous data format depending on the ACU type Refer to Appendix A for additional information o
255. rn appears as follows CR It designates the Return or Enter key It is used to complete a text entry or initiate an action from the keyboard Special Notices These notices emphasize certain information in the manual Each serves a special purpose and is displayed in the format shown IMPORTANT Important is used to emphasize any significant procedural information Caution Caution provides information that if not followed can result in damage to software hardware or data Warning Warning is the most serious notice indicating that you can be physically hurt XV Using the Documentation Set continued Messages sp ciaux Les messages suivants mettent en valeur certaines informations dans le guide Chacun d eux remplit une fonction sp ciale et est affich dans le format indiqu IMPORTANT Important est utilis pour souligner des informations critiques au sujet d une proc dure Mise en Garde Une mise en garde vous fournit des informations qui si elles ne sont pas observ es peuvent se traduire par des dommages pour le logiciel le mat riel ou les donn es 4 Avertissement Un avertissement constitue le message le plus s rieux indiquant que vous pouvez subir des blessures corporelles Besondere Hinweise Durch die folgenden Hinweise werden bestimmte Informationen in diesem Handbuch hervorgehoben Jeder Hinweis dient einem bestimmten Zweck und wird im dargestellten Format angezeigt WICHTI
256. roved by Telenetics could void the user s author ity to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations This is a Class A product Operation of this equipment in a residential environment may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to correct the interference at his her own expense This product is CISPR 22 Class B verified under test conditions that included use of shielded DTE cables Ferrite cylinders attached to the dial line are required for Modem 3266 Can ada Leased line cables with 1 5 turns through a ferrite cylinder were also used Use of dif ferent cables will invalidate verification and increase the risk of causing interference to radio and TV reception You can obtain the proper cables from Telenetics This product is CE marked to indicate compliance with the following European directives 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive Safety 89 336 EEC EEC Directive Compliance with the above directives may only be assured when the equipment is installed and operated in accordance with the instructions for its use and the purpose for which it is intended Products that do not bear the CE mark are not intended for supply or use in the European Union Part No TEL TO009 Rev A Publication Code DS First Printing January 2001 Manual is current for Release 8 0 of the 326X Series Modem
257. rs from inadvertently placing the modem into command mode if they are transmitted in a message If data is sent within the guard time the escape sequence is not detected The default guard time is one second The guard time specified by S Register 12 also specifies the maximum time between the three consecutive escape characters If more than the allowable time elapses between escape characters the escape sequence is ignored Setting S Register 12 to Zero disables the guard time so that the rate at which you enter the escape sequence is not a factor To use the escape sequence with guard time 1 Pause a bit longer than the guard time 2 Send ensuring the delay between s is less than the specified guard time When a valid escape sequence is detected the modem responds with OK Do not send commands until the OK response has been received A command that is sent too soon may not be interpreted correctly 3 Pause again a bit longer than the guard time 4 Enter commands to the modem 5 When you are ready to resume the call to the remote system type ATO lt CR gt The modem returns to the online state When using error correction if you escape from the data state to the command state the modem buffers any data received from the remote site When you return online to data state the buffered data is sent to the DTE Non Configuration AT Commands Most AT commands cross reference to a front panel option Some AT comman
258. rything before theAT prefix The G is ignored This command disables the asynchronous echo feature ATS2 Q 1 lt CR gt Multiple command line Selects S Register 2 as the current S Register displays contents of S Register 2 turns on result code displays and sets S Register 2 to 1 For Further Detail on AT Commands For a description of AT commands and dial modifiers refer to Appendi xA 5 4 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface Autobaud Feature The modem automatically detects the speed and character format of the following AT commands issued from your DTE AT at A a This means that any AT command you issue to the modem will cause the modem to Autobaud The exception is the lower case af and upper case A from which only speed can be detected When the a or A commands are issued the modem assumes parity to be the same as that of the previous command NOTE Autobaud does not operate when the modem is online in escape mode Autobauding works at the following DTE rates bps 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 000 14 400 16 800 19 200 21 600 24 000 26 400 28 800 38 400 57 600 115 200 Table 5 2 summarizes the 10 bit total character formats for autobauding Autobauding is valid only with 10 bit character formats Table 5 2 Valid Autobauding Character Formats Start Bit Data Bits Parity Stop Bits 1 7 Even or Odd 1 1 7 None 2 1 7 Mark or Space 1 1 8 None 1 Result codes such as RING a
259. s This S Register specifies the lead digit delay timeout when ACCESS SECURITY Tone ATK ZP is enabled S Register 96 Signalling System 5 Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Range Yes No 0 0 1 This S Register specifies whether Signalling System 5 is enabled 5 16 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface S Register 97 Break Signal Duration Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default 0 represents 1 second Range 0 39 S Register 97 Value Break Signal Duration ms 0 1000 1 second 1 26 2 52 3 78 4 104 5 130 6 156 7 182 8 208 9 234 10 260 Il 286 12 312 13 338 14 364 15 390 16 416 17 442 18 468 19 494 20 520 21 546 22 572 23 598 24 624 25 650 26 676 27 702 28 728 29 754 30 780 31 806 32 832 33 858 34 884 35 910 36 936 37 962 38 988 39 1000 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 17 nov 1v eu Duren Using the AT ACU S Register 98 AC Detect Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default 0 Range 0 1 This S Register applies to V 32bis and V 34 operating modes It enables and disables AC Tone Protect which is part of the modem s training sequence S Register 99 V 32 Training Time Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default 0 Range 0 to 216 One unit 32 baud 13 5 milliseconds This S Register extends part of the V 32 modulation mode training time It provides a w
260. s For details refer to Chapter 3 in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide If you are using communications software you normally do not use the AT command set directly Your communications software will do this for you 5 2 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface What is the Attention AT Command Set The AT command set is a collection of commands that let you configure a modem directly from an asynchronous terminal or PC keyboard The characters AT are a prefix to the commands you issue to your modem When you type AT you are asking for the modem s attention For instance to disconnect a telephone call you type AT for attention and HO for on hook hang up You can also use AT commands to configure a remote modem refer to Chapter 2 Front Panel Operation of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details What Role Does Communications Software Play Some communications software packages interpret AT commands with pull down menus or graphics making familiarity with the AT command syntax unnecessary Communications software packages that directly support the 326X Series Modem usually support all of the modem s AT commands the industry standard commands AT AT amp and the Telenetics enhanced commands AT Ze Communications software packages that support a Hayes compatible selection do not support the Telenetics enhanced commands AT You can enter these commands yourself to modify option settings if required by you
261. s 3265 7 550 AT amp GI 1800 AT amp G2 in 3266 8 AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 40 AT amp PO Always 33 AT amp P1 Always 33 AT amp P1 Always 33 AT amp P1 Pulse Cycle ATKAA Manual AT ZE AAO Manual ATK AAO Answer Ring 1 ATX AAI Ring 2 AT AA2 Ring 2 AT AA2 Using SO AT K AAS AT BD Restricted Always 4 sec Restricted Blind Dial AT BD1 AT KCD Off AT gt KCDO 3 sec AT CD1 Loss Dis 3 sec AT KCDI 7 sec AT KCD2 7 sec AT KCD2 AT KDD 2 sec AT KDDO 2sec AT KDDO Always 6 sec 3 sec AT KDD1 Dial Wait 4 sec AT KDD2 4sec AT KDD2 AT KDD3 4 sec AT KDD2 6 sec AT KDD3 6sec AT zk DD 6 sec AT Ze DD3 15 sec AT KDDS5 Using S7 AT Ze DD 20 sec AT KDD6 AT KDP Always 4 sec Pause Delay AT DR Off AT KDRO Off AT gt K DRO Auto Redial 1 AT DRI 1 AT DRI1 2 AT DR2 2 AT DR2 3 AT XDR3 l3 AT gt K DR3 4 AT DR4 ATLL Restricted Restricted LAL Busy Out AT LN Restricted Restricted DTE Pin 25 ATK TL Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Always 72 ms Tone Length AT TLO AT TLO AT TLO AT TLO ATX TT 30 sec AT TTO 30 sec AT TTO 30sec AT gt KTTO Call Timeout 60 sec AT KTT2 60 sec AT KTT2 60 sec ATK TT2 DL TX Level Always 10dBm Always 9dBm Always 9 dBm Always 11dBm LL TX Level Always 10dBm Always 0dBm Always 13 dBm Always 6dBm C 10 Country Specific Information Feature Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Universal ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 T
262. s a K k or lt dial modifier Pause Delay AT k DP must be set to S8 AT kDP4 to use S Register 8 s setting ee This S Register also determines the time duration of the pause delay for the character when used in an AT command string The modem pauses for the specified time before continuing to process the command string With the k K or lt dial modifier if S Register 8 is set to O or 1 the pause delay defaults to two seconds S Register 10 Carrier Loss Hang Up Delay Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Yes Status Only No Default Setting 15 Range 1 to 255 S Register 10 determines how long in 100 millisecond increments data carrier must be lost before the modem hangs up NOTE This applies to V 22bis B212 V 21 and B103 operation only To use S Register 10 s setting the front panel DCD Loss Dis option AT CD must be set to S10 Also if S Register 10 is set to 255 the modem will not hang up because of a carrier loss Setting the AT CD DCD Loss Disconnect option under the TERMINAL OPT S menu to 10 enables the DCE disconnect feature for V 32 V 32bis and V 34 modulation modes For these modes the S Register 10 determines the length of time in seconds for the modem to disconnect when the remote modem goes on hook without sending a longspace or PSTN cleardown In Normal or Direct modes S10 must be set between 1 9 seconds For Reliable mode S10 must be set between 1 8 seconds Th
263. s auto dial or auto answer features set the modem s DTE Rate TERMINAL OPT S category to that of the package Some communications packages do not let you select the higher rates available with the 326X FAST V 34 modem while using the package s auto dial or auto answer functions To take advantage of the higher DTE rates do the following a Set the package for Direct or Terminal mode b Select the higher speed of the package c Set the modem s DTE Rate to match the package s set speed d Use the AT command set to establish the connection Some file transfer protocols offered by a communications package may not operate properly when DTE Rate is greater than 38 4 kbps because some serial ports cannot sustain data transmission at these rates If the Communications Software and Modem Do Not Operate If after following the suggestions in this section you cannot get the communications software package and modem to operate refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Guide If you still cannot get the communications software package and modem to operate contact your software vendor for assistance Preparing for Operation The procedures in this chapter assume that you are installing the modem for the first time If you want to reinstall the modem perform the procedure s below to reinitialize the modem s memory NOTE Reinitializing modem memory sets modem parameter options back to factory defaults Option Set 1 and deletes sto
264. s section shows the modem s S Registers cross referenced with AT Commands and front panel options For details on S Registers refer to Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface Table A 3 S Register Cross Reference S Register AT Command Front Panel Option SO Ring Count to Answer On AT AAS Answer Using SO S1 Ring Count S2 Escape Code Character S3 Carriage Return Character S4 Line Feed Character S5 Backspace Character S6 Wait for Dial Tone AT BD2 Blind Dial S6 S7 Wait for Data Character AT DD9 Dial Wait S7 S7 Wait for Data Character AT TT5 Call Timeout S7 S8 Pause Time for Pause Delay Dial AT DP4 Pause Delay S8 Modifiers S10 Carrier Loss Hang Up Delay AT CD3 DCD Loss Dis S10 S11 DTMF Tone Duration AT TL1 Tone Length S11 S12 Escape Code Guard Time S18 Test Timer S25 Delay Before Looking for DTR S26 RTS CTS Delay AT DL4 RTS CTS Delay S26 S30 DTE Inactivity Disconnect ATK SIS Inactivity S30 S38 Disconnect Buffer Delay AT DB3 Delay S38 S 45 Access Security Tone Duration S46 Access Security Lead Digit Delay Timeout 96 Signalling System 5 AT K S96 0 to 1 S97 Break Signal Duration ATS97 0 to 39 S98 AC Detect ATX S98 0 to 1 S99 V 32 Training Time AT S99 0 to 216 A 38 Configuration Quick Reference Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements When entering telephone numbers into mod
265. s turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed After dialing the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call e The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT K TT option For these call failure conditions four subsequent redial attempts are allowed If the redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of five calls within one hour the number is placed on the delayed list Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes After 60 minutes the number is available for dialing France Delayed and Forbidden Call Lists The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed and forbidden calls according to PTT regulations Before dialing a number the modem determines whether The number is on the delayed or forbidden list The delayed or forbidden lists are full the list holds 16 numbers In either case the number is not dialed When the modem is turned off and then on again the lists are cleared and the numbers can be dialed The following criteria determine on which list the number is placed Delayed List The modem detects one of the following delay conditions The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout AT TT option If one or both of these conditions is detected for six consecutive calls the number is placed on the
266. share a common physical transmission channel employed in pairs one at each end of the channel where each device performs both multiplexing of the multiple user inputs and demultiplexing of the channel back into the separate user data streams 2 A device that allows two or more analog data signals to be transmitted simultaneously over a single telephone line The description for when a telephone or modem connects to the dial line and presents electrical characteristics similar to when a telephone handset is removed from the cradle An error checking mechanism for asynchronous transmission An additional nondata bit added to a group of bits that indicates whether the number of 1 s in the group is odd or even Private branch exchange A telephone switching system located on a customer s premises The deviation in phase of the transmitted analog signal from its timing signal often caused by alternating current components in a telecommunications network It is continuous long term and often nearly constant in frequency and severity A line that directly connects two end points e g a remote location to a host computer opposite of multipoint A connector and associated circuitry enabling digital data to be injected into or retrieved from a communications network Formal set of rules governing the format timing sequencing and error control of exchanged messages on a data network Public Switched Telephone Network Postal Teleg
267. t through 92151 92150 Telenetics 92157 50 30 10 6 Male 25 Female 25 92156 Straight Through 92155 92154 Telenetics 92161 50 30 10 6 Male 25 Female 25 99169 Crossover 92159 92158 NOTE Telenetics DB 25 Cables have a conductor capacitance of 11 pF ft and a shield capacitance of 20 pF ft for a total capacitance of 31 pF ft For example operating at 19 2 kbps a 50 ft length of cable multiplied by a total capacitance of 31 pF ft yields a maximum allowable cable capacitance of 1550pF which is acceptable in accordance with Table B 4 Cabling and Interface Pinouts B 9 s nould eu Ul Interface Pinouts Table B 6 Vendor Wire for 326X Conductor Shield Up to Part Capacitance Capacitance Upto19 2 Upto64 0 Upio96 0 115 2 Vendor Number pF pF kbps ft kbps ft kbps ft X kbps ft Belden 9948 35 63 24 49 9 18 4 08 2 04 9671 30 55 28 24 10 59 4 71 2 35 8125 12 5 22 69 57 26 09 11 59 5 80 9937 12 22 70 59 26 47 11 76 5 88 8155 11 20 77 42 29 03 12 90 6 45 Manhattan M39026 33 65 24 49 9 18 4 08 2 04 M13201 30 50 30 11 25 5 00 2 50 M2414 26 47 32 88 12 33 5 48 2 74 M3431 12 5 22 69 57 26 09 11 59 5 80 M2434 12 22 70 59 26 47 11 76 5 88 Madison 25QFIOBTI 14 6 26 3 58 68 22 9 78 4 89 25QFISBTI 12 4 22 4 68 97 25 86 11 49 5 75 NOTE To determine cable length add the conductor and shield capacitance specified above to determine the total wire capacitance For example if you are using a Belden wire Part Numb
268. tems are not available it is your responsibility to package the contents in a manner that protects the equipment from damage during normal shipping and handling Responsibility for damage to equipment during transit must be resolved between you and the carrier The Logistics Administration group can provide you with specific packaging instructions upon request Symbols AT escape sequence 5 5 5 13 lt gt 5 13 3 5 dial modifier 5 12 Numerics 35XX device 4 23 A A 5 7 A B LED 3 4 AC Detect S Register 98 5 18 Access security lead digit delay timeout S Register 46 5 16 tone duration S Register 45 5 16 Adaptive Rate System 1 9 Adaptive rate system 1 9 ALM LED 3 4 Always C 5 APPC APPN 4 19 Application examples SDC 4 22 V 32bis and V 34 4 21 asynch data forma t3 2 asynchronous host computer 4 16 AT 5 3 AT ACU configure and operate modem 3 8 AT command set 5 2 AT commands 1 8 escape sequence 5 5 x Change S Register Value 5 10 Display S Register Value 5 10 A Manual Answer 5 7 A Autobaud 5 5 5 7 and autobaud feature 5 5 cross referenced to front panel options A 2 D Dial 5 7 entering 5 3 errors in entry 5 4 H Hang Up 5 8 I Display Software Information 5 8 O Leave Command Mode 5 8 result codes A 41 Sn x Change S Register Value 5 10 Sn Display S Register Value 5 9 X Call Progress 5 7 Australia C 6 Index Austria C 6 Auto Call Unit ACU LPDA 2 1 5 V 25bis 1 5 Autobaud 5
269. ter 7 5 12 Wait for dial tone S Register 6 5 12 Warnhinweis Beschreibung xvi Warning statement connecting ports C 4 website 2 3 WICHTIG Hinweis Beschreibung xvi window sizes 4 21 X X25 network 4 16 X 25 node 4 16 Index 5
270. ter Values Display S Register Value ATSn Settings n Specifies S Register Format ATSn lt CR gt This command displays the value of S Register n as stored in volatile memory If a appears in the command string anywhere other than immediately following the S Register number the command displays the value of the last S Register selected If you try to read the value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 9 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU Display S Register Value AT Settings Selected S Register Format AT CR This command displays the contents of the selected S Register as stored in volatile memory The selected S Register is the last S Register that was accessed using an S Register command or the ATSn command The number must be within the S Register s specified range On power up S Register 0 is selected If you try to read the contents of an unused S Register the modem displays OK Change S Register Value ATSx n Settings n Specifies S Register x Specifies value of S Register Format ATSn x lt CR gt This command lets you change the value of an S Register stored in volatile memory n is the S Register to change and x is the value x must be a number within the S Register s range If you try to change the value of an unused S Register the modem displays OK Change S Register Value AT x Settings x Specifies value of select
271. th in FAR 52 227 19 C Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Notice continued Proprietary Material Information and software in this document are proprietary to Telenetics Corporation or its Suppliers and without the express prior permission of an officer of Telenetics Corporation may not be copied reproduced disclosed to others published or used in whole or in part for any purpose other than that for which it is being made available Use of software described in this document is subject to the terms and conditions of the Telenetics Software License Agreement This document is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice Radio Frequency Interference Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Note the 3262 63 67 68 Modem is a Class A product In a domestic environment this prod uct may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Changes or modifications not expressly app
272. th AT TLO AT gt K TLO AT gt KTLO AT gt KTLO AT TT 30 sec AT KTTO 30sec AT KTTO 30 sec AT KTTO 45 sec ATXTTI1 Call Timeout 60sec AT KTT3 60sec AT KTT2 60 sec AT KTT3 60 sec AT ZEIT Se AT TT2 90 sec ATK TT2 Using S7 AT TT5 Using S7 AT TT5 DL TX Level Always 9 dBm Always 11dBm Always 11 dBm Always 10dBm LL TX Level Always 0 dBm Always 11dBm Always 11 dBm Always 13dBm Country Specific Information C 7 uoneuuoju oyioeds Anuno5 Country Specific Information Feature Germany Hong Kong Ireland Israel ATH Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Busy Out ATH1 Test Restricted all models Restricted in 3265 6 ATX Call Progress AT amp D7 Restricted 108 2 Bsy AT amp G 550 AT amp GI Guard Tone 1800 AT amp G2 in 3265 7 Always 1800 AT amp G2 in 3266 8 AT amp J Restricted Restricted Restricted Restricted Telco AT amp P Always 40 Always 33 Always 33 Always 40 Pulse Cycle AT amp PO AT amp P1 AT amp PI AT amp PO AT K AA Manual AT 3 AAO Manual AT ZE AAO Manual AT KAAO Manual AT AAO Answer Ring 1 ATK AAI Ring 2 AT KAA2 Ring 1 AT KAAI Ring 2 AT AAT Ring 2 AT AA2 Ring 2 AT AA2 Ring 4 ATK AA4 AT BD 2 sec AT gt K BDO Blind Dial 4 sec AT BD1 AT KCD Off AT CDO Loss Dis 3 sec ATXCD1 7 sec AT KCD2 AT ZS DD 2 sec AT KDDO Always 6 sec 3 sec AT KDDI 2 sec AT KDDI Dial Wait 4 sec AT KDD2 AT KDD3 4 sec AT DD2 4sec AT DD2 6 sec AT gt KDD3 6 s
273. that use the direct data transfer mode no error correction The modem ignores this option in the normal reliable or auto reliable data transfer modes Do not change this option unless your application requires it If you must change it select the option that corresponds to the number of bits that your DTE uses to code a character start bit data bits parity bit and stop bit NOTE Autobauding works only with 10 bit characters 8 Modem is compatible with 8 bit characters 9 Modem is compatible with 9 bit characters 10 Modem is compatible with 10 bit characters 11 Modem is compatible with 11 bit characters V25 Char Determines the type of character the V 25bis ACU uses ASCII The V 25bis ACU uses ASCII character format EBCDIC The V 25bis ACU uses EBCDIC character format Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 34 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 2 Front Panel Configuration Options Continued Parameter amp 326X Menu Option Description Sync Idle Applies to synchronous applications only direct synchronous or SDC operating modes Your modem sends Marks or Characters on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 to the DTE when it has no messages to send Mark Modem sends continuous Marks or one bits on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 3 V 24 Circuit 104 to the DTE when it has no messages to send Char Applies to V 25bis and LPDA2 ACUs If
274. ting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution Check whether modem is set for If your DTE cannot handle Tx clock stopping set Flow Tx Clk ATK FL5 Flow Off AT ZS FLO or use CTS flow control Check if TpDlyMin Rx Clk If your DTE equipment cannot handle Rx clock stopping AT TD1 set TpDlyMin Off ATK TDO or set TpDlyMin RxD Div AT TD2 If both modems are 326X SDC If the option sets are not the same select the same option check to ensure option sets are sets in both modems using Select Options ATZ the same in both modems command Check if one of your modems If the local or remote modem is a 326X SDC modem set local or remote isa 326X SDC Fast Call Off AT KFCO in it unit Poor throughput Check your applications proto performance col e f a window size of oneis Increase window size used half duplex protocol If using Novell IPX Ensure burst mode is selected Check whether TpDlyMin Off If your DTE can handle Rx clock stopping set AT K TDO or TpD TpDlyMin Rx Clk lyMin RxD Dly ATK TD2 Check if modem is set for If your DTE can handle Tx clock stopping set Flow Tx Flow Off AT FLO Clk ATK FL5 If it does not support Tx clock stopping use CTS If performance is not satisfac The optimum frame size for most applications is between tory experiment with frame and 128 and 1024 bytes window sizes The optimum window size for most applications is 7 to 4 If link utilization is low Increase t
275. ting the Modem from the Front Panel AAA Selecting Programmed Option Automatic Calling Interfaces AT ACU sstezestesesusaigeeeeeg Nds ise E LPDA2 ACU orriren Managing a Modem Restoring Data Transmission ITU T V 34 Compliant Modulation Mode cuiii eret serta cule castas Synchronous Data Compression SDC Feature eee Automode Multimode Feature Remote Configuration Error Correction and Data Compression eeesec ee eren tee uttter e uia e Status Snapshots Adaptive Rate System Troubleshooting V 54 and V 2 Country Specific Information NET Compliance 1er CE Regulatory Marking Directive 93 68 EEC siccciscsccccinesasisivesssscanunessvenres cl JR ES Fd DC ccc ON e Feat Feat bet be bech bet bet ben Feat Feat bet ben Fe Feat Feat ben bech Fei kech VD NONO VM M GO GO GO GO J JC Ch Ch Un Un CA CA CA 4 Wb DIO EE About the Modem 1 1 w poN ay 1noqy About the Modem Introduction 1 2 About the Modem This chapter summarizes the features and options of the 326X Series Modem The series includes The 326X V 32bis Series Modem which operates in V 32bis modulation mode The 326X FAST Series Modem which can operate in V 34 modulation mode The 326XFAST SDC Series Modem which can operate in V 34 modulation mode and the Synchronous Data Compression mode In this guide references to the modem apply to all of the
276. tings and S register values Save Changes Save Changes When using AT Commands or front panel options to alter modem settings if you do not save the changes the modem does not enter them into memory After you have selected the option set for your application using the ATZn Command and modified configuration settings enter AT amp Wn where n Option Set 1 through 4 The modem displays Saving Options then Save Completed signifying that the option set has been saved in nonvolatile memory AT amp WO 1 Save changes to Option Set 1 AT amp WI Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options A 12 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description AT amp W2 22 Save changes to Option Set 2 AT amp W3 3 Save changes to Option Set 3 AT amp W4 4 Save changes to Option Set 4 Clock Clock Sets modem timing and applies to synchronous applications only For most dial applications use internal timing AT amp X0 Internal The modem uses internal timing timing signals are passed on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 15 V 24 circuit 114 Internal timing is used for most applications AT amp X1 External The modem uses external timing timing signals are passed on EIA TIA 232 D Pin 24 V 24 circuit 113 Internal timing is used for most applications AT amp X2 Loopback The modem uses l
277. tion Uer e M es C 3 Uu SODDOP E C 3 UN CA Restricted Features SUEDE ss rAgeE ita ke HO ERRORES EE C 5 crure rJ qe C 12 Standalone Modem Rear Panel Views 2s02 cccsccsssccetessecesns sete ectetuer etie pe C 12 3260 Dial Only Modemi E C 13 3261 Modem Rear View Leased Line Dial Restoral C 13 vil Contents continued viii 22655 Dial Only Modem upeissa 3266 Modem Leased Line with Dial Restoral Rear Panel Interface Pinout oer Standalone Models 3260 65 and 3261 66 Interface Pinouts Card Models 3262 67 3263 68 Backplane Interface Pinouts Delayed and Forbidden Lists tnn Australia Delayed Call Lists s Austria Forbidden Call Lists Belgium Delayed Call Lists Finland Delayed Call Lists 5 eee France Delayed and Forbidden Call Lists Hong Kong Delayed Call Lists Ireland Delayed Call Lists ss Netherlands Delayed Call Lists Norway Delayed Call Lists sse Spain belayed Call Lists tenen Other Country Specific Information Canada m DOC Registration and Requirem
278. top the test Synchronous Data Compression SDC Testing When performing diagnostic tests in SDC mode note the following All tests are supported When initiating the following online tests Remote digital loopback Remote digital loopback pattern Data mode pattern Local digital loopback during SDC connection the modem falls back to Direct mode Mode Direct ATXSM to run the test If the modem is set for internal timing Clock Internal AT amp X the DTE clock is changed to match the DCE rate If the modem is set for external timing Clock External AT amp X the clock rate provided may not match the DCE rate and the test will not function Set Clock Internal temporarily to complete testing and then reset to External To test the synchronous data path s integrity while running loopback tests set the modem for one of the asynchronous buffered modes Mode Normal Reliable Auto Reliable or Speed Auto Reliable Troubleshooting Guide 6 11 Bunoouse qnoujj Appendix A Configuration Quick Reference Contents Configuration Quick Reference Menu Trees esee A 2 For More Diet M A 2 Audience wu A 2 Performing Numeric Entty 12st erster ern uer exon Kee eege A 37 S Register AT Command Cross Reference eee A 38 Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements eese A 39 Resuli Code IE A 41 Conf
279. tore command setting FP 116 or FP 116 ACU AT KOCI Pin 20 Loads an option set based on the transition of Pin 20 When using this setting set the AT amp D DTR command to High This setting overrides theAT RE Restore command settings FP 108 1 and FP 108 ACU and all AT amp D DTR command settings except High Ext Select External Option Set Select also known as 116 Select Controls how the modem uses an external pin to select option sets The pin used is defined by the ATK OC Ext Cntrl command ATX OPO Off The AT OP command is disabled AT OPI 1H 2L There are 12 settings with the format nH mL where n 1 2 3 or 4 and m 1 2 3 or 4 When the pin specified by the Ext Cntrl option 14 or 20 transitions from low to high the modem loads the H option set When the pin specified by the Ext Cntrl option 14 or 20 transitions from high to low the modem loads the L option set AT OP2 1H 3L ATK OP3 1H 4L Gray shading indicates country specific options See Appendix C for your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 25 e2ueJoJog oinp uoneanBiuo Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description ATX OP4 2H 1L ATX OP5 2H 3L ATX OP6 2H 4L ATX OP7 3H 1L ATX OP8 3H 2L ATX OP9 3H 4L AT KOP10 4H 1L AT gt KOPI1 4H 2L ATK OP12 4H 3L Overspeed Overspeed Lets
280. transmit and receive circuits amp T1 Loopback by looping local DTE data from the modem s transmitter to its receiver Local Analog Tests the local modem s transmit and receive circuits STI Loopback Pattern with an internally generated test pattern Remote Digital Using local DTE data this test examines the transmit amp T6 Loopback and receive circuits of the local and remote modems and the telephone line Remote Digital Tests the transmit and receive circuits of the local and amp T7 Loopback Pattern remote modems and the telephone line Data Mode Pattern The modem uses internally generated test patterns to Not provide data and separately test the inbound and applicable outbound halves of the transmission path Local Digital Using the remote DTE data for the test the telephone amp T3 Loopback lines and the remote modem circuits are tested Busy Out Allows the modem to appear busy to incoming calls H1 Retrain Lets you manually retrain local and remote modems Ol Terminate Terminates any test in progress amp TO 6 10 Troubleshooting Guide Initiating and Terminating Tests from the Modem s Front Panel To initiate a test from the modem s front panel 1 Press wp until you reach the TEST OPTS category 2 Press p until you reach Test End Test 3 Press wr until Test LAL for example 4 Press to start the test To terminate a test from the modem s front panel 1 Press wp until Test End Test 2 Press to s
281. ts itself to settings that let it answer a call and be accessed by an NMS or remote modem The modem may be dialed into and reconfigured Stored phone numbers and saved option sets remain unchanged When Remote Access Reset Is Disabled Remote access reset is not supported when the modem is attached to a network management system If you select it in this situation NETMAN ATTACHED displays To invoke remote access reset set OverrideMode On NETWK CRTL OPT S Remote access reset is not supported when the modem is password protected i e when pressing W and p for three seconds displays PASSWD PROTECTED To choose the remote access feature you must first unlock the modem either from the front panel or with the AT kPN enter password command 4 28 Configuring the Modem Chapter 5 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface Contents Ires iie ET 5 2 What is the Attention AT Command Set sccsscscssseossvcivecssncnecssanesessnertts 5 3 What Role Does Communications Software Play ssse 5 3 Using AT Commands ME 5 3 Entering AT Command LIes uestes cce ene eruca eet d ye diese 5 3 Autobaud FeatiihE T 5 5 The Bscape EE 5 5 Non Configuration AT Commands 5 iier torrentes 5 6 educ ing MEER A E E N EE O E 5 9 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 1 nov 1v eu Duren Using the AT ACU Introduction The 326X Series Modem supports an
282. ud rate before the package recognizes the ring message Set DTE Rate by the front panel or by issuing an AT command when the modem is configured for autobaud operations Flow Control Requirements Flow control prevents buffer overflow when line disturbances cause frequent retransmissions See AT XFL for the DTE and AT ZS MF for the modem in Appendix A If the communications package does not directly support the 326X Series Modem and you want to use the package s file transfer method If the communications package supports RTS CTS flow control enable it a Set the modem to Flow RTS CTS b Set Modem Flow Off c Transfer data using the instructions in the communications package If the communications package does not support RTS CTS flow control a Set the modem to Flow Off b Set Modem Flow Off c Transfer data using the instructions in the communications package If the communications package supports the automatic speed detect feature set Max Rate to a value also supported by the software package Set Speed Conver Off Set the modem s adaptive rate parameter to Off 4 4 Configuring the Modem 326XFAST V 34 and 326X7AST SDC Notes The information in this section applies when operating at the higher DTE rates available with the 326X FAST V 34 and 326XFAST SDC Series Modems f the communications software package supports the higher terminal rates available with these modems and you want to use the package
283. ui BuunBiyuo5 Configuring the Modem Bandwidth On Demand Bandwidth on demand is often required to support sporadic peak loads With the SDC modem you can ensure full network availability and performance at low dial up line costs without having to prioritize users or applications Figure 4 4 shows a point to point digital link with Telenetics 35XX DSU CSUs connecting two routers over a DDS circuit The SDC modems are also connected directly to the routers During peak network access periods the router is configured to signal the SDC modem to establish a dial connection through the PSTN Users transparently bypass the digital link using the 326XFAST SDC PSTN link to continue data transmission As bandwidth demands subside the dial call is dropped and transmission resumes over the DDS link The SDC modem supports all industry standard ACUs AT V 25bis DTR dialing and LPDA 2 Bandwidth on demand can be initiated terminated under the control of the nodal equipment by a secondary port NOTE Nodal equipment must be configured for secondary port restoral bandwidth on demand operation Refer to the nodal equipment documentation for instructions on configuring for this application Select SDC Option Set 3 for a bandwidth on demand application All operational information described in the preceding section SDC Option Set 3 Sync Dial Only applies to this application To 33 6 kbps SS Ne aa PSTN See P l I 326X FAS
284. uide 6 5 Bunoouse qnoujj Troubleshooting 326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide Continued Problem Diagnosis Test Possible Solution Data is garbled or lost Check the modem s flow control Ensure that the DTE s flow control is the same as the settings modem setting Data stops passing for example XON XOFF RTS CTS If your communications package s file transfer protocol is used and the package supports RTS CTS Flow control set Flow RTS CTS AT FL3 If the package does not support RTS CTS flow control set Flow Off AT ZS FLO Check that the modem s DTE If they do not match adjust as necessary rate parity and character length match the DTE s settings If in normal mode check line quality Check CQMS parameters signal quality and error probability Run a remote digital If no errors occur the line is good loopback RDL or RDL If errors occur perform a manual retrain or retry the with pattern test phone call f you are still receiving If the LAL or LAL with pattern test fails contact Telenet errors disconnect the ics Customer Support or your local distributor modem from the line and If the LAL or LAL with pattern test passes you may have perform a local analog a line problem contact your telephone company or a loopback LAL or LAL problem with your application check with your software with pattern test with vendor modem flow control off Modem could be in flow off
285. ume user bandwidth The modem supports a daisy chain network management interface reducing the hardware required for connections Refer to Chapter 2 Installing the Modem for instructions on installing and cabling a modem for use with Telenetics Network Management Systems Restoring Data Transmission For critical leased line applications that require backup you can use Models 3261 3263 3266 or 3268 in a point to point configuration If the leased line fails these modems can automatically reroute data traffic through the public switched telephone network PSTN over a 2 wire dial line This integral dial line restoral feature guarantees that data will keep flowing minimizing network downtime ITU T V 34 Compliant Modulation Mode 1 6 About the Modem 326X FAST and 326X FAST SDC modems support the ITU T V 34 compliant modulation mode 326XFAST SDC modems offer the same broad set of features available in the 326XFAST modems and let you take advantage of faster transmission speeds while providing highly reliable data transmission in full duplex synchronous environments 326XFAST modems have a line probing feature that optimizes performance on every connection by automatically choosing the optimum bandwidth carrier frequency and data rate Synchronous V 34 Modulation Mode Characteristics V 34 modulation mode characteristics are as follows Data Rate 2 4 4 8 7 2 9 6 12 0 14 4 16 8 19 2 21 6 24 0 26 4 28 8
286. ve than the Low BER setting NOTE Telenetics recom mends this setting for most applications Using V 34 V 32bis V 32 or V 32 Uncoded the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 for eight seconds Using V 22bis the modem retrains when the bit error rate BER exceeds approximately 10 3 for one second When ARS is enabled bit error rate is always used Speed Conver Speed Conversion Determines whether the modem uses the speed conversion feature This option does not apply when the modem is in the Direct or synchronous data transfer mode AT SCH Off The modem adjusts its DTE port speed to match the speed of the negotiated data link AT SC1 On DTE to modem speed remains constant regardless of the negotiated data link speed The exception is Direct data mode where the DTE to modem speed always matches the modem to modem speed Inactivity DTE Inactivity Lets you select how long the modem waits before disconnecting when no data is transferred This option does not apply when the modem is set for the synchronous data transfer mode ATK SI Off The Off option disables the inactivity timer ATKSIL 3min The modem disconnects if 3 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE ATK SI2 Inactivityz10min The modem disconnects if 10 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE ATSB 20min The modem disconnects if 20 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE ATK SI4 30min Th
287. w LPDA 2 ACU 3 10 network configuration 4 2 Network Control Port connector pinouts B 7 Network management 1 6 Network management cables 2 7 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INHIBITED message A 41 network management system 1 2 network performanc e1 8 NO ANSWER messag eA 41 NO CARRIER message A 41 NO DIALTONE messag eA 41 Normal mode 5 13 Norway C 10 NRZ NRZI 4 21 Numeric entry A 37 O OK message A 41 operation problems 6 2 optimizing network performance 4 21 option set 3 5 Option Set 1 SDC async calls to central site 4 8 Option Set 2 Sync Answering Central Site 4 7 Option Set 2 SDC sync dial A B restoral 4 9 Option Set 3 Sync Calls to Central Site 4 7 Option Set 4 async answering at central site 4 8 option sets 1 5 options 3 5 P parameters 3 5 PASSWORD PROTECTED message A 41 password protection A 45 Pause delay dial modifiers S Register 8 5 13 Index 3 PHONE connector pinouts B 7 Pinouts EIA TIA 232 D B 2 interface 3260 65 C 18 3261 66 C 19 3262 67 C 22 3263 68 C 22 ITU V 35 recommendatio nB 5 LEASE LINE B 6 NC Network Control port B 7 PHONE B 7 pinouts C 39 Poland C 7 Portugal C 10 Postscript number 5 4 power cable 2 7 2 9 2 14 power connectors 2 5 R RC ABORTED message A 41 RC COMPLETE messag eA 41 RC DENIED message A 41 RC ESTABLISHED message A 41 RC FAILED message A 41 RC NOT AVAILABLE message A 41 RC SESSION IN PROGRESS message A 41 RC NC LED 3 4 Re 5 6 rear p
288. with the remote modem Check DTE for EIA signal requirements Ensure the modem is correctly cabled to the DTE with a straight through cable for your electrical interface V 35 or RS 232 Check that the correct communications port is being used Ensure that the DTE rate matches the modem s terminal rate setting Ensure that the DTE s flow control is the same as the modem s setting for example XON XOFF RTS CTS f your communications software package s file transfer protocol is used and the package supports RTS CTS Flow control set Flow RTS CTS AT FL3 If the package does not support RTS CTS flow control set Flow Off AT gt FLO Turn modem flow control off After running the RDL if no errors occur your line is good If errors occur perform a manual retrain or retry the phone call If the LAL or LAL with pattern test fails contact Telenet ics Customer Support or your local distributor If the LAL or LAL with pattern test passes you may have a line problem contact your telephone company or a problem with your application check with your software vendor Ensure that the remote modem supports error correction Premature disconnect Check the disconnect reason from the modem s front panel If the remote modem does not support error correction set the modem to normal mode and retry the call Based upon the disconnect reason take the appropriate action Troubleshooting G
289. y Yes Status Only No Default 0 Range 0 to 255 x 10 seconds If DTE Inactivity S30 AT KSI the modem disconnects when data is not sent or received for an amount of time greater than the value stored in S Register 30 multiplied by 10 seconds Time outs range from 10 to 2550 seconds 42 5 minutes A value of 0 stored in S Register 30 disables the DTE inactivity option Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5 15 nov 1v eu Buisn Using the AT ACU S Register 38 Disconnect Buffer Delay Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Range Yes No 5 0 to 255 seconds S Register 38 determines how long the modem processes buffered data when a disconnect is initiated For S Register 38 to affect the Delay option AT ZS D I Delay EC OPT S menu must be set to Buf or S38 or Buf amp S38 S Register 45 A ccess Security Tone Duration Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Range Yes No 5 0 to 10 seconds This S Register specifies the prompt tone duration when the ACCESS SECURITY option Tone Prompt Only or Prompt Ack AT ZP This delay is measured from the time that the prompt tone is generated by the answer modem to the time that the answer modem detects the first digit of the calling modem s password S Register 46 Access Security Lead Digit Delay Timeout Stored in Nonvolatile Memory Status Only Default Range Yes No 12 0 to 255 second
290. your country s options Configuration Quick Reference A 15 o2ueJoJou oinp uoneanBiyuo2 Configuration Quick Reference Table A 1 AT Commands Cross Heferenced to Front Panel Options Continued AT Parameter amp Command Option Description Con Msg Connect Message AT CMO DTE Rate Selecting DTE Rate results in the current DTE rate being displayed on your terminal after the connect message AT CMI DCE Rate Selecting DCE Rate results in the current DCE rate being displayed on your terminal after the connect message AT KCNI Enter Phone See the AT amp Z command description 9 phoneno 1 9 AT CTO CTS High CTS is always high Use this setting if you plan to use RTS CTS or DTR CTS Flow control AT amp RI AT KCTI Normal The modem controls CTS as in normal handshaking In V 25bis ACU operation CTS follows DTR in command state CTS is off in training retraining and follows RTS in data mode For AT ACU operation CTS follows RTS in command state CTS is off in training retraining and follows RTS in data mode If an ACU is not selected CTS is low AT KCT2 ACU On CTS is on in ACU mode goes off during training retraining and follows RTS in data mode AT KCT3 AsyncSync CTS is on in asynchronous mode and off in synchronous ACU mode In synchronous data AT amp RO transfer mode CTS is off in training retraining and follows RTS in data mode When CTS follows RTS in data mode the setting of the RTS C
291. yping ATHI while in command mode causes the modem to Busy Out until either the ATH command is entered or the key is pressed NOTE For busy out make certain that the TELCO OPT S Telco option is set for RJ4MB ATI Display Software Information Settings 0 Displays 960 1 Displays 000 2 Displays OK 9 Displays reason for last disconnect Format ATIn lt CR gt The messages described above are displayed in addition to the OK sent whenAT command processing is complete NOTE If this command is the last or only command in a command line an additional OK message follows the above responses ATO Leave Command Mode Settings 0 Leave command mode and return online 1 Leave command mode return online and initiate a retrain Format ATOn lt CR gt This command can be used only when the modem is in the online escape mode or 66 99 after a semicolon dial modifier in a dial string The user may leave escape mode and return to data mode by typing ATO or ATOO If a retrain is desired while returning to data mode ATO1 must be used If this command is issued while the modem is disconnected from the phone line the modem responds with NO CARRIER If this command is issued while the modem is in a remote configuration session the modem responds with ERROR NOTE If the ATO command is issued after a semicolon dial modifier return to command state after dialing the modem trains as an originat

Telenetics 326X V.34 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents